Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
WELCOME TO MINI.
OWNER'S MANUAL.
MINI COOPER SE.
Thank you for choosing a MINI.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have
on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. Also use the
Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important information
on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features
available in your MINI. The manual also contains information designed to
enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your MINI.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of
the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with your MINI.
3
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Navigation, Entertainment and Communication can be called up via the
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
NOTES
Information.............................................................................................................................. 6
QUICK REFERENCE
Entering..................................................................................................................................16
Set-up and use.......................................................................................................................19
On the road............................................................................................................................ 23
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit.................................................................................................................................... 32
Central Information Display (CID)..................................................................................36
Voice activation system.................................................................................................... 44
General settings................................................................................................................... 48
Owner's Manual media.......................................................................................................60
MINI eDRIVE........................................................................................................................62
Safety of the high-voltage system.................................................................................. 65
CONTROLS
Opening and closing........................................................................................................... 66
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel.................................................................................85
Transporting children safely............................................................................................ 95
Driving..................................................................................................................................100
Displays................................................................................................................................ 118
Lights.................................................................................................................................... 135
Safety.....................................................................................................................................141
Driving stability control systems.................................................................................162
Driving comfort................................................................................................................. 167
4
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Climate control...................................................................................................................180
Interior equipment............................................................................................................187
Storage compartments.....................................................................................................198
Cargo area............................................................................................................................201
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving.............................................................................. 208
Increasing range................................................................................................................212
MOBILITY
Charging the vehicle........................................................................................................ 218
Wheels and tires................................................................................................................227
Engine compartment........................................................................................................243
Coolant..................................................................................................................................246
Maintenance....................................................................................................................... 248
Replacing components.................................................................................................... 250
Breakdown assistance..................................................................................................... 256
Care........................................................................................................................................262
REFERENCE
Technical data.................................................................................................................... 268
Appendix..............................................................................................................................270
Everything from A to Z....................................................................................................272
© 2020 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID5 II/20, 03 20 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
5
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Information
Using this Owner's Manual
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a
particular topic is by using the index.
An initial overview of the vehicle is pro-
vided in the first chapter.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline,
differences may exist between the printed
Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's
Manual in the vehicle.
Notes on updates can be found in the ap-
pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for
the vehicle.
Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter-
tainment, and Communication can be ob-
tained as a printed book from the service
center.
The topics are also discussed in the
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Additional sources of informa-
tion
Service center
A service center will be glad to answer
questions at any time.
Internet
Vehicle information and general informa-
tion on MINI, e.g., on technology, are availa-
ble on the Internet: www.miniusa.com.
Integrated Owner's Manual in the
vehicle
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically
describes features and functions found in
the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual
can be displayed on the Control Display. Ad-
ditional information, refer to page 60.
MINI Motorer’s Guide app
The app specifically describes features and
functions found in the vehicle. The app can
be displayed on smartphones and tablets.
MINI Motorer’s Guide Web
Driver’s Guide Web shows the most suita-
ble information for the selected vehicle. If
possible, only equipment and functions that
are actually installed in the vehicle will be
explained. Driver’s Guide Web can be dis-
played in any current browser.
Symbols and displays
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Symbol Meaning
Precautions that must be
followed in order to avoid the
possibility of injury to yourself
and to others as well as serious
damage to the vehicle.
Measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
Seite 6
NOTES Information
6
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Symbol Meaning
"..." Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with
the voice activation system..
››...‹‹ Responses generated by the
voice activation system.
Action steps
Action steps to be carried out are presented
as a numbered list. The steps must be car-
ried out in the defined order.
1. First action step.
2. Second action step.
Enumerations
Enumerations without mandatory order or
alternative possibilities are presented as a
list with bullet points.
– First possibility.
– Second possibility.
Symbols on vehicle components
This symbol on a vehicle component
indicates that further information on the
component is available in the Owner's
Manual.
The symbols on parts of the vehicle indicate
that incorrect use of high-voltage equip-
ment or of orange-colored high-voltage
components results in the risk of life-threat-
ening injury from electric shock.
Vehicle features and options
This Owner's Manual describes all models
and all standard, country-specific and op-
tional equipment that is offered in the
model series. Therefore, this Owner's
Manual also describes and illustrates fea-
tures and functions that are not available in
a vehicle, for example because of the se-
lected optional features or the country-spe-
cific version.
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
For any options and equipment not descri-
bed in this Owner's Manual, refer to the
Supplementary Owner's Manuals.
Your dealer’s service center is happy to an-
swer any questions that you may have
about the features and options applicable to
your vehicle.
Status of the Owner's Manual
Basic information
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
policy of constant development that is con-
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue
to embody the highest quality and safety
standards. In rare cases, therefore, the fea-
tures described in this Owner's Manual may
differ from those in your vehicle.
Seite 7
Information NOTES
7
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Updates made after the editorial
deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline,
differences may exist between the printed
Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's
Manual in the vehicle.
Notes on updates can be found in the ap-
pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for
the vehicle.
For Your Own Safety
Manufacturer
The manufacturer of this MINI is Bayeri-
sche Motoren Werke Aktionengesellschaft,
BMW AG.
Intended use
Heed the following when using the vehicle:
– Owner's Manual.
– Information on the vehicle. Do not re-
move stickers.
– Technical vehicle data.
– The traffic, speed, and safety laws where
the vehicle is driven.
– Vehicle documents and statutory docu-
ments.
Warranty
Your vehicle is technically configured for
the operating conditions and registration
requirements applying in the country of
first delivery, also known as homologation.
If your vehicle is to be operated in a differ-
ent country it might be necessary to adapt
your vehicle to potentially differing operat-
ing conditions and registration require-
ments. If your vehicle does not comply with
the homologation requirements in a certain
country you may not be able to lodge war-
ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further
information on warranty is available from a
service center.
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, for instance the use
of modern materials and high-performance
electronics, requires suitable maintenance
and repair work.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends that you entrust corresponding pro-
cedures to a MINI dealer’s service center. If
you choose to use another service facility,
the manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends use of a facility that performs work,
e.g., maintenance and repair, according to
MINI specifications with properly trained
personnel, referred to in the Owner's
Manual as "another qualified service center
or repair shop".
If work is performed improperly, for in-
stance maintenance and repair, there is a
risk of subsequent damage and related
safety risks.
Improperly performed work on the vehicle
paint can lead to a failure or malfunction of
components, e.g., the radar sensors, and
thereby result in a safety risk.
Parts and accessories
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends the use of parts and accessory prod-
ucts approved by the manufacturer of the
MINI.
Approved parts and accessories, and advice
on their use and installation are available
from a MINI dealer's service center.
MINI parts and accessories were tested by
the manufacturer of the MINI for their
safety and suitability in MINI vehicles.
The manufacturer of your vehicle warrants
genuine MINI parts and accessories.
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not
evaluate whether each individual product
Seite 8
NOTES Information
8
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
from another manufacturer can be used
with MINI vehicles without presenting a
safety hazard, even if a country-specific of-
ficial approval was issued. The manufac-
turer of your vehicle does not evaluate
whether these products are suitable for
MINI vehicles under all usage conditions.
California Proposition 65 Warning
For vehicles sold in California, the law re-
quires vehicle manufacturers to provide the
following warning:
Warning
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Au-
tomobile components and parts, including
components found in the interior furnish-
ings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemi-
cals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and repro-
ductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products
of component wear contain or emit chemi-
cals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other re-
productive harm. Battery posts, terminals
and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the State of Cali-
fornia to cause cancer. Wash your hands
after handling. Used engine oil contains
chemicals that have caused cancer in labo-
ratory animals. Always protect your skin
by washing thoroughly with soap and wa-
ter. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve-
hicle.
Warning
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-highway motor
vehicle can expose you to chemicals in-
cluding engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing ex-
haust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a well-
ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve-
hicle.
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publica-
tion thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by
the following warranties:
– New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
– Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
– Federal Emissions System Defect War-
ranty.
– Federal Emissions Performance War-
ranty.
– California Emission Control System Lim-
ited Warranty.
Detailed information about these warranties
is listed in the Service and Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet for US models or in the War-
ranty and Service Guide Booklet for Cana-
dian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted
and designed to meet the particular operat-
ing conditions and homologation require-
ments in your country and continental re-
gion in order to deliver the full driving
pleasure while the vehicle is operated under
those conditions. If you wish to operate
your vehicle in another country or region,
you may be required to adapt your vehicle
to meet different prevailing operating con-
ditions and homologation requirements.
You should also be aware of any applicable
warranty limitations or exclusions for such
country or region. In such case, please con-
Seite 9
Information NOTES
9
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
tact Customer Relations for further informa-
tion.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain
the road safety, operational reliability and
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for maintenance measures:
– MINI Maintenance system.
– Service and Warranty Information Book-
let for US models.
– Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models.
If the vehicle is not maintained or is im-
properly maintained, this could result in se-
rious damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
not covered by the MINI New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty.
Refer to chapter engine oil change regard-
ing recommended service intervals for oil
changes.
Data memory
General information
Electronic control devices are installed in
the vehicle. Electronic control units process
data they receive from vehicle sensors, self-
generate or exchange with each other. Some
control units are necessary for the vehicle
to function safely or provide assistance dur-
ing driving, for instance driver assistance
systems. Furthermore, control units facili-
tate comfort or infotainment functions.
Information about stored or exchanged data
can be requested from the manufacturer of
the vehicle, in a separate booklet, for exam-
ple.
Personal reference
Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehi-
cle identification number. Depending on the
country, the vehicle owner can be identified
with the vehicle identification number, li-
cense plate and corresponding authorities.
In addition, there are other options to track
data collected in the vehicle to the driver or
vehicle owner, for instance via utilized
services.
Operating data in the vehicle
Control units process data to operate the ve-
hicle.
For example, this includes:
– Status messages for the vehicle and its
individual components, e.g., wheel rota-
tional speed, wheel speed, deceleration,
transverse acceleration, engaged safety
belt indicator.
– Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature,
rain sensor signals.
The processed data is only processed in the
vehicle itself and generally volatile. The
data is not stored beyond the operating pe-
riod.
Electronic components, e.g. control units
and ignition keys, contain components for
storing technical information. Information
about the vehicle condition, component us-
age, maintenance requirements events or
faults can be stored temporarily or perma-
nently.
This information generally records the state
of a component, a module, a system, or the
environment, for instance:
– Operating states of system components,
for instance, fill levels, tire inflation
pressure, battery status.
– Malfunctions and faults in important
system components, for instance lights
and brakes.
Seite 10
NOTES Information
10
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
– Responses by the vehicle to special sit-
uations such as airbag deployment or
engagement of the driving stability con-
trol systems.
– Information on vehicle-damaging
events.
The data is required to perform the control
unit functions. Furthermore, it also serves
to recognize and correct malfunctions, and
helps the vehicle manufacturer to optimize
vehicle functions.
The majority of this data is volatile and is
only processed within the vehicle itself.
Only a small share of the data is stored
event-related in event or fault memories.
When servicing, for instance during repairs,
service processes, warranty cases, and qual-
ity assurance measures, this technical infor-
mation can be read out from the vehicle to-
gether with the vehicle identification
number.
A dealer’s service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop can read
out the information. The socket for OBD On-
board Diagnosis required by law in the ve-
hicle is used to read out the data.
The data is collected, processed, and used
by the relevant organizations in the service
network. The data documents technical con-
ditions of the vehicle, helps with the identi-
fication of the fault, compliance with war-
ranty obligations and quality improvement.
Furthermore, the manufacturer has product
monitoring duties to meet in line with prod-
uct liability law. To fulfill these duties, the
vehicle manufacturer needs technical data
from the vehicle. The data from the vehicle
can also be used to check customer claims
for warranty and guaranty.
Fault and event memories in the vehicle can
be reset when a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop performs repair or servicing work.
Data entry and data transfer into
the vehicle
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, com-
fort and individual settings can be stored in
the vehicle and modified or reset at any
time.
For example, this includes:
– Settings for the seat and steering wheel
positions.
– Suspension and climate control settings.
If necessary, data can be transferred to the
entertainment and communication system
of the vehicle, for instance via smartphone.
This includes the following depending on
the respective equipment:
– Multimedia data such as music, films or
photos for playback in an integrated
multimedia system.
– Address book data for use in conjunc-
tion with an integrated hands-free sys-
tem or an integrated navigation system.
– Entered navigation destinations.
– Data on the use of Internet services.
This data can be stored locally in the vehicle
or is found on a device that has been con-
nected to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone,
USB stick or MP3 player. If this data is
stored in the vehicle, it can be deleted at
any time.
This data is only transmitted to third parties
upon personal request as part of the use of
online services. The transmission depends
on the selected settings for the use of the
services.
Incorporation of mobile devices
Depending on the vehicle equipment, mo-
bile devices connected to the vehicle, for in-
stance smartphones, can be controlled via
the vehicle control elements.
Seite 11
Information NOTES
11
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
The sound and picture from the mobile de-
vice can be played back and displayed
through the multimedia system. Certain in-
formation is transferred to the mobile de-
vice at the same time. Depending on the
type of incorporation, this includes, for in-
stance position data and other general vehi-
cle information. This optimizes the way in
which selected apps, for instance navigation
or music playback, work.
There is no further interaction between the
mobile device and the vehicle, such as ac-
tive access to vehicle data.
How the data will be processed further is
determined by the provider of the particular
app being used. The extent of the possible
settings depends on the respective app and
the operating system of the mobile device.
Services
General information
If the vehicle has a wireless network con-
nection, this enables data to be exchanged
between the vehicle and other systems. The
wireless network connection is realized via
an in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit
or via personal mobile devices brought into
the vehicle, for instance smartphones. This
wireless network connection enables 'online
functions' to be used. These include online
services and apps supplied by the vehicle
manufacturer or by other providers.
Services from the vehicle
manufacturer
Where online services from the vehicle
manufacturer are concerned, the corre-
sponding functions are described in the ap-
propriate place, for instance the Owner's
Manual or manufacturer's website. The rele-
vant legal information pertaining to data
protection is provided there too. Personal
data may be used to perform online serv-
ices. Data is exchanged over a secure con-
nection, for instance with the IT systems of
the vehicle manufacturer intended for this
purpose.
Any collection, processing, and use of per-
sonal data above and beyond that needed to
provide the services must always be based
on a legal permission, contractual arrange-
ment or consent. It is also possible to acti-
vate or deactivate the data connection as a
whole. That is, with the exception of func-
tions and services required by law such as
Assist systems.
Services from other providers
When using online services from other pro-
viders, these services are the responsibility
of the relevant provider and subject to their
data privacy conditions and terms of use.
The vehicle manufacturer has no influence
on the content exchanged during this proc-
ess. Information on the way in which per-
sonal data is collected and used in relation
to services from third parties, the scope of
such data, and its purpose, can be obtained
from the relevant service provider.
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-
like situations, such as an air bag deploy-
ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics and
safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re-
cord such data as:
– How various systems in your vehicle
were operating.
Seite 12
NOTES Information
12
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
– Whether or not the driver and passen-
ger safety belts were fastened.
– How far, if at all, the driver was depress-
ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
– How fast the vehicle was traveling.
This data can help provide a better under-
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if
a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data
is recorded by the EDR under normal driv-
ing conditions and no personal data, for in-
stance name, gender, age, and crash loca-
tion, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the ve-
hicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the spe-
cial equipment, can read the information if
they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Vehicle identification number
Engine compartment
The vehicle identification number can be
found in the engine compartment, on the
right-hand side of the vehicle.
Windshield
The vehicle identification number can also
be found behind the windshield.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles
owned and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in-
jury or death, you should immediately in-
form the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration NHTSA, in addition to noti-
fying MINI of North America, LLC, P.O. Box
1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227,
Telephone 1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of ve-
hicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or MINI of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-
tor, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
Seite 13
Information NOTES
13
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call
the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You
can also obtain other information about mo-
tor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.
Seite 14
NOTES Information
14
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Seite 15
Information NOTES
15
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Entering
Opening and closing
Buttons on the vehicle key
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Unlocking the tailgate
4 Panic mode
Unlocking the vehicle
Press the button on the vehicle key.
Depending on the settings, either only the
driver's door or all vehicle access points are
unlocked.
If only the driver's door is unlocked, press
the button on the vehicle key again to un-
lock the other vehicle access points.
Press and hold the button on the ve-
hicle key after unlocking.
The windows and the glass sunroof are
opened, as long as the button on the vehicle
key is pressed.
Locking the vehicle
Press the button on the vehicle key.
All vehicle access points are locked.
Buttons for the central locking
system
Overview
Buttons for the central locking system.
Locking
Pressing the button locks the vehi-
cle if the front doors are closed.
Unlocking
Pressing the button unlocks the ve-
hicle.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button on the vehicle key
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Comfort Access
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without operat-
ing the vehicle key.
Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in
your pants pocket, is sufficient.
Seite 16
QUICK REFERENCE Entering
16
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
The vehicle automatically detects the vehi-
cle key when it is in close proximity or in
the car's interior.
Unlocking the vehicle
On the driver's or front passenger's door
handle, press the button.
Locking the vehicle
On the driver's or front passenger's door
handle, press the button.
Tailgate
unlocking
– Unlock the vehicle and then press the
button on the outside of the tailgate.
– Press and hold the button on the
vehicle key for approx. 1 second.
Depending on the setting, the doors may
also be unlocked.
Closing
Closing the tailgate manually.
Displays and control elements
In the vicinity of the steering
wheel
1 Low beams, fog lights
2 High beams, headlight flasher, turn sig-
nal
3 Instrument cluster
4 Wiper system
Indicator/warning lights
Instrument cluster
The indicator/warning lights can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when
drive-ready state is established.
Seite 17
Entering QUICK REFERENCE
17
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Driver's door
1 Power windows
2 Exterior mirrors
All around the selector lever
1 Selector lever
2 Controller with buttons
3 Parking brake
Central Information Display (CID)
Concept
The Central Information Display (CID) com-
bines the functions of a multitude of
switches. These functions can be operated
via the Controller.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: calls up the main
menu.
Press twice: open recently used
menus.
Opens the Communication menu.
Opens the Media/Radio menu.
Opens destination input menu
for navigation.
Opens navigation map.
Opens the previous display.
Opens the Options menu.
Voice activation
Activating the voice activation system
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
This symbol indicates that the voice ac-
tivation system is active.
If no other commands are available, operate
the function via the Central Information
Display (CID).
Terminating the voice activation
system
Press the button on the steering
wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Seite 18
QUICK REFERENCE Entering
18
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Set-up and use
Seats, mirrors, and steering
wheel
Manually adjustable seats
1 Forward/backward
2 Thigh support
3 Height
4 Backrest tilt
Adjusting the head restraint
Height
– To raise: push the head restraint up.
– To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
1 Adjusting
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon-
itor
3 Folding in and out
Adjusting the steering wheel
In four directions
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer-
red height and angle to suit your seating
position.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Seite 19
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE
19
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Entering the rear
1. Pull lever up to the stop.
2. Fold backrest forward.
3. Push the seat forward.
Original position
1. Push the seat back into the original po-
sition.
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.
Infotainment
Radio
Control elements
1 Changing the waveband
2 Changing the entertainment source
3 Sound output on/off, volume
4 Changing the station/track
5 Programmable memory buttons
Navigation destination entry
Entering a destination via address
State/province
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. "State/Province?"
4. Select the country from the list.
Entering the address
The address can be entered in any order.
Example: entering the address via the town/
city
1. "City/Postal code?"
2. Enter the town/city.
The list is narrowed down further with
each entry.
3. Select the symbol.
4. Select a town/city from the list.
5. If necessary, enter the street.
6. Select the street as you would the town/
city.
7. If necessary, enter a house number.
8. Select the symbol.
9. Select a house number or range of house
numbers from the list.
Starting destination guidance
"Start guidance"
If only the town/city was entered: destina-
tion guidance is started to the town/city
center.
Pairing the mobile phone
After the mobile phone is paired once with
the vehicle, the mobile phone can be oper-
ated using the Central Information Display
Seite 20
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
20
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
(CID), the steering wheel buttons and spo-
ken instructions.
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is dis-
played on the Control Display.
5. Select the functions for which the mo-
bile phone is to be used.
6. To perform additional steps on the mo-
bile phone, refer to the mobile phone
owner's manual: e.g., search for or con-
nect the Bluetooth device or a new de-
vice.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap-
pears on the mobile phone display. Se-
lect the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.
7. Depending on the mobile device, a con-
trol number is displayed or the control
number must be entered.
– Compare the control number dis-
played on the Control Display with
the control number on the display of
the device.
Confirm the control number on the
device and on the Control Display.
– Enter and confirm the same control
number on the device and via the
Central Information Display (CID).
The device is connected and displayed
in the device list.
The mobile phone is connected and will ap-
pear at the top of the list of mobile phones.
Using the phone
Accepting a call
Incoming call can be accepted via the Cen-
tral Information Display (CID) or the button
on the steering wheel.
Via the Central Information Display (CID)
"Accept"
Via the button on the steering wheel
Press the button.
Via the instrument cluster
Use the OK button on the steering wheel to
select: "Accept"
Dialing a number
1. "Communication"
2. "Dial number"
3. Select the numbers individually.
4. Select the symbol.
Establish the connection via the additional
phone:
1. Press the button.
2. "Call via"
Apple CarPlay preparation
Concept
CarPlay allows certain functions of a com-
patible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri
voice operation and the Central Information
Display (CID).
Functional requirements
– Compatible iPhone.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
– Corresponding mobile contract.
– Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice opera-
tion are activated on the iPhone.
Seite 21
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE
21
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the following settings:
– "Bluetooth®"
– "Apple CarPlay"
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay
Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle.
Select CarPlay as the function:
"Apple CarPlay"
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and
displayed in the device list.
Seite 22
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
22
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
On the road
Driving
Drive-ready state
General information
When drive-ready state is switched on, the
vehicle is operational.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the
instrument cluster light up for a varied
length of time.
Activated drive-ready state is the equiva-
lent of a running engine in conventional ve-
hicles. Deactivated drive-ready state is
equivalent to switching the engine off.
To save battery power when parking, switch
off drive-ready state and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
Drive-ready state is switched off automati-
cally:
– When you lock the vehicle while low
beams are switched on.
– If the charge state of the batteries is
low.
– When opening or closing the driver
door, if the driver's safety belt is un-
buckled and the low beams are switched
off.
– While the driver's safety belt is unbuck-
led with driver's door open and low
beams off.
After the driver's door is opened or closed
or the driver's safety belt is released, the
radio-ready state remains active.
Start/Stop button
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches standby state on or
off.
Drive-ready state is switched
on when you depress the
brake pedal while pressing the Start/Stop
button.
Switching on drive-ready state
1. Close the driver's door.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Drive-ready state is switched on.
Displays
READY indicates drive-ready
state.
Drive-ready state in detail
Requirements
Driving is possible under the following con-
ditions:
– The high-voltage battery is sufficiently
charged.
– The driver's door is closed.
– Charging cable is detached.
Driving away
1. Switch on drive-ready state.
2. Apply the brake and engage the selector
lever in position D or R.
Seite 23
On the road QUICK REFERENCE
23
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Depress the accelerator pedal to drive
off.
Accelerator pedal positions
1 Deceleration
2 Coasting
3 Acceleration or constant speed: ePO-
WER
Engaging the gear
– Interlock: the selector lever position P
can be exited only with drive-ready
state engaged.
– Shift lock: with the vehicle stationary,
press on the brake pedal before shifting
out of P or N; otherwise, the shift com-
mand will not be executed.
– Shift lock: before shifting out of P, re-
move the charging cable from the vehi-
cle; otherwise, the shift command will
not be executed.
Engaging N, D, R
Move the selector lever in the desired direc-
tion.
Engaging P
Apply brake and press button P.
Parking brake
Setting
Pull the switch when the vehicle is
stationary.
The LED and indicator light light up.
Releasing
Press the switch while stepping on the
brake pedal or selector lever position P
is set.
The LED and indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
Seite 24
QUICK REFERENCE On the road
24
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
High beams, headlight flasher, turn
signal, roadside parking light
High beams, headlight flasher
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
– High beams on, arrow 1.
The high beams light up when the low
beams are switched on.
– High beams off/headlight flasher, ar-
row 2.
Turn signal
– On: press the lever past the resistance
point.
– Off: lightly tap the lever to the resist-
ance point.
– Off: press the lever past the resistance
point in the opposite direction.
– Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap
the lever up or down.
– Brief signaling: press the lever to the re-
sistance point and hold it there for as
long as you want the turn signal to flash.
Canada: roadside parking light
To illuminate the vehicle on one side.
– On: with the standby state switched off,
press the lever either up or down past
the resistance point for approx. 2 sec-
onds.
– Off: briefly press the lever to the resist-
ance point in the opposite direction.
Lights and lighting
Light functions
Symbol Function
Front fog lights.
Automatic headlight control.
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
Parking lights.
Low beams.
Instrument lighting.
Seite 25
On the road QUICK REFERENCE
25
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe
Switching on
Press the lever up until the desired position
is reached.
– Resting position of the wipers: posi-
tion 0.
– Rain sensor: position 1.
– Normal wiper speed: position 2.
– Fast wiper speed: position 3.
Brief wipe and switching off
Press the lever down.
– Switching off: press the lever down until
it reaches its standard position.
– Brief wipe: press the lever down from
the standard position.
Rain sensor
Activating/deactivating
To activate: press the lever up once from its
standard position, arrow 1.
To deactivate: press the lever back into the
standard position.
Set interval or sensitivity of the rain
sensor
Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
Seite 26
QUICK REFERENCE On the road
26
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Canada: wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe
Switching on
Tap up the lever or press it past the resist-
ance point.
– Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
– Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap
once beyond the resistance point.
Brief wipe and switching off
Press the lever down.
– To switch off fast wipe: press down
twice.
– To switch off normal wipe: press down
once.
– Brief wipe: press down once.
Rain sensor
Activating/deactivating
Press the button on the wiper lever.
Set interval or sensitivity of the rain
sensor
Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
Seite 27
On the road QUICK REFERENCE
27
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Climate control
Automatic climate control
Button Function
Temperature.
Air conditioning.
Maximum cooling.
AUTO program.
Recirculated-air mode.
Controls the air flow,
manual.
Air distribution, manual.
Defrosts and defogs the
windows.
Rear window defroster.
Charging the vehicle
Charging the vehicle
Charging socket flap
The charging socket flap is located on the
right side of the vehicle.
Always keep charging socket clean and un-
obstructed.
Keep the charging socket flap closed when
the charging socket is not used.
Connecting the charging cable
To connect, engage selector lever posi-
tion P, deactivate drive-ready state, and un-
Seite 28
QUICK REFERENCE On the road
28
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
lock the vehicle. Set the parking brake, if
needed.
1. Tap on the charging socket flap, arrow.
The charging socket flap opens.
2. Remove the charging socket lid, arrow.
3. Remove the cover of the charging cable
plug, if needed.
4. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the
household socket or Level 2 charging
cable to the port on the charging station.
5. Insert the appropriate charging cable
plug, and push it in until it engages.
When charging at a charging station, follow
the instructions at the charging station.
Removing
When the charging process is active and
the vehicle is locked, the charging cable is
automatically locked. Unlock the vehicle be-
fore removing the cable.
When the charging process is completed,
the charging cable is automatically un-
locked.
If necessary, clean the area between the
charging socket flap and charging socket,
for instance from snow, before removing it.
1. Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key
if it is locked.
Charging cable is unlocked.
2. Press the release button on the handle,
arrow 1, and grasp the charging cable at
the gripping areas.
Charging process is interrupted.
3. Remove the charging cable from the
charging socket, arrow 2.
4. Put the charging socket lid back on.
5. Press on the charging socket flap until it
engages.
6. Attach cover of the charging cable plug,
if needed.
7. Disconnect Level 1 charging cable from
the household socket or Level 2 charg-
ing cable from the port on the charging
station as applicable.
8. Stow the charging cable.
At a charging station, insert the perma-
nently installed charging cable in the
place provided for it.
Seite 29
On the road QUICK REFERENCE
29
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressure specifications
The tire inflation pressure values can be
found on the sign on the door pillar.
Checking the tire inflation pressure
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure
and correct it as needed:
– At least twice a month.
– Before embarking on an extended trip.
After correcting the tire inflation
pressure
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Providing assistance
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located above the Control Dis-
play.
Breakdown assistance
MINI Roadside Assistance
This service can be reached around the
clock in many countries.
1. "MINI Connected"
2. "MINI Assist"
3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"
The contact to the MINI Roadside Assis-
tance is established.
A telephone number is displayed, if
needed. Select to dial the telephone
number on a connected mobile phone.
Seite 30
QUICK REFERENCE On the road
30
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Seite 31
On the road QUICK REFERENCE
31
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and
functions that are not necessarily available
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Power windows 81
2 Exterior mirror operation 92
3 Buttons of the central locking sys-
tem 71
4 Lights
Front fog lights 138
Light switch 135
Lights off
Daytime running lights 137
Parking lights 135
Low beams 135
Seite 32
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
32
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Automatic headlight con-
trol 136
Cornering light 137
High-beam Assistant 137
Instrument lighting 139
5 Steering wheel buttons, left
Cruise control on/off 167
Cruise control: to store the
speed
Pausing, continuing cruise
control
Cruise control: increase speed
Cruise control: reduce speed
6 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 109
High beams, head-
light flasher 109
High-beam Assistant 137
Roadside parking lights 136
Onboard Computer 129
7 Instrument cluster 118
8 Steering column stalk, right
Wipers 109
Wiper on Canadian mod-
els 113
Rain sensor 110
Rain sensor on Canadian mod-
els 114
Cleaning windows 111
Rear window wiper in Cana-
dian models 112
Rear window wiper 112
Clean the rear window 112
9 Steering wheel buttons, right
Voice activation 44
Telephone
Confirm the selection 128
Move selection up 128
Move selection down 128
Increase volume
Reduce volume
10 Horn, entire surface
11 Adjusting the steering wheel 94
Seite 33
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
33
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
12 Unlocking the hood 244
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Hazard warning system 256
Intelligent Safety 152
2 Control Display 36
3 Radio/Multimedia
4 Glove compartment 198
5 Climate control 180
6 PDC Park Distance Con-
trol 169
Rearview camera 172
Parking assistant 175
Energy recovery 104
Switch drive-ready state on
and off 100
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
162
MINI Driving Modes
switch 164
7 Transmission selector lever 102
8 Controller with buttons 38
9 Parking brake 107
Seite 34
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Central Information Display (CID)
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and
functions that are not necessarily available
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Concept
The Central Information Display (CID) com-
bines the functions of a multitude of
switches. These functions can be operated
via the Controller.
Safety information
Warning
Operating the integrated information sys-
tems and communication devices while
driving can distract from traffic. It is pos-
sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is
a risk of accident. Only use the systems or
devices when the traffic situation allows.
As warranted, stop and use the systems
and devices while the vehicle is stationary.
Input and display
Letters and numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be-
tween entering upper and lower case let-
ters, numbers and characters:
Symbol Function
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Insert blank space.
Use voice activation.
Confirm entry.
Without navigation system
Select the symbol.
Entry comparison
When entering names and addresses, the
choice is narrowed down with every letter
entered and letters may be added automati-
cally.
Entries are continuously compared with
data stored in the vehicle.
– Only those letters are offered during en-
try for which data is available.
– Destination search: place names can be
entered in all languages that are availa-
ble on the Control Display.
Activating/deactivating the
functions
Several menu items are preceded by a
checkbox. The checkbox indicates whether
the function is activated or deactivated. Se-
lecting the menu item activates or deacti-
vates the function.
Seite 36
AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)
36
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Status information
General information
The status field can be found in the upper
area of the Control Display. Status informa-
tion is displayed in the form of symbols.
Radio
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being re-
ceived.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Signal strength of cellular net-
work.
Symbol flashes: network search.
Cellular network is not available.
Roaming is active.
SMS text message received.
Message received.
Reminder.
Sending not possible.
Entertainment
Symbol Meaning
Bluetooth audio.
USB audio interface.
Mobile phone audio interface.
Other symbols
Symbol Meaning
Check Control message.
The sound output has been
switched off.
Encrypted connection not ac-
tive.
Request for the current vehicle
position.
Checking the current vehicle po-
sition.
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed on
the right side of the split screen, for in-
stance information from the Onboard Com-
puter.
In the divided screen view, the so-called
split screen, this information remains visi-
ble even when switching to another menu.
Switching the split screen on/off
1. Press the button.
2. "Split screen"
Seite 37
Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE
37
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Selecting the display
The display can be selected in menus which
support the split screen function.
1. Move the Controller to the right until
the split screen is selected.
2. Press the Controller.
3. Select the desired setting.
Specifying the number of displays
It is possible to specify the number of dis-
plays.
1. Move the Controller to the right until
the split screen is selected.
2. Press the Controller.
3. "Personalize menu"
4. Select the desired setting.
5. Move the Controller to the left.
Control elements
Overview
1 Control Display with touchscreen
2 Controller with buttons
Control Display
General information
To clean the Control Display, follow the care
instructions, refer to page 266.
In the case of very high temperatures on
the Control Display, for instance due to in-
tense solar radiation, the brightness may be
reduced down to complete deactivation.
Once the temperature is reduced, for in-
stance through shade or air conditioning,
the normal functions are restored.
Safety information
NOTICE
Objects in the area in the front of the Con-
trol Display can shift and damage the Con-
trol Display. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not place objects in the area
in front of the Control Display.
Switching on/off automatically
The Control Display is switched on automat-
ically when the vehicle is unlocked or as
soon as the Control Display is needed for
operation.
In certain situations, the Control Display is
switched off automatically, for instance if
no operation is performed on the vehicle for
several minutes.
Switching on/off manually
The Control Display can also be switched off
manually.
1. Press the button.
2. "Turn off control display"
Press the Controller or any button on the
Controller to switch it back on again.
Controller with navigation system
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The Controller can be used to se-
lect menu items and enter the settings.
Seite 38
AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)
38
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Operation
– Turn to switch between menu items, for
example.
– Press to select a menu item, for example.
– Tilt in four directions to switch between
displays, for example.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: calls up the main
menu.
Press twice: open recently used
menus.
Opens the Communication menu.
Opens the Media/Radio menu.
Opens destination input menu
for navigation.
Opens navigation map.
Opens the previous display.
Opens the Options menu.
Controller without navigation
system
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The Controller can be used to se-
lect menu items and enter the settings.
Operation
– Turn to switch between menu items, for
example.
Seite 39
Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE
39
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
– Press to select a menu item, for example.
– Tilt in two directions to switch between
displays, for example.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Press once: calls up the main
menu.
Press twice: open recently used
menus.
Opens the Communication menu.
Opens the Media/Radio menu.
Opens the previous display.
Opens the Options menu.
Operating via the Controller
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
The main menu is displayed.
All Central Information Display (CID) func-
tions can be called up via the main menu.
Selecting menu items
Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1. Turn the Controller until the desired
menu item is highlighted.
2. Press the Controller.
Adjusting menu contents
The display of menus "Media/Radio",
"Communication" and "MINI Connected" can
be adjusted, for instance to remove the en-
tries of functions that are not used from the
menu.
Seite 40
AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)
40
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Via Central Information Display (CID):
1. Select the menu.
2. "Personalize menu"
3. Select desired menu contents to be dis-
played.
Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, for instance
"System settings", a new display appears.
– Move the Controller to the left.
The current display closes and the previ-
ous display is shown.
– Press the button.
The previous display re-opens.
– Move the Controller to the right.
The new display opens.
An arrow indicates that additional displays
can be opened.
Opening recently used menus
The recently used menus can be displayed.
Press the button twice.
Opening the Options menu
Press the button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
The menu consists of various areas, for in-
stance:
– "Split screen": screen settings.
– "Media/Radio": control options for the
selected main menu.
– "Save station": if applicable, further con-
trol options for the selected menu.
Entering letters and numbers
Input
1. Turn the Controller: select letters or
numbers.
2. : confirm entry.
Deleting
Symbol Function
Press the Controller: delete
letters or number.
or
Hold the Controller down: de-
lete all letters or numbers.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-
tries, the letters for which there is an entry
are displayed at the left edge.
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right
quickly.
All letters for which there are entries
are displayed on the left edge.
2. Select the first letter of the desired en-
try.
The first entry of the selected letter is
displayed.
Operation via touchscreen
General information
The Control Display is equipped with a
touchscreen.
Touch the screen with your fingers. Do not
use any objects.
Opening the main menu
Tap on the symbol.
Seite 41
Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE
41
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
The main menu is displayed.
All Central Information Display (CID) func-
tions can be called up via the main menu.
Selecting menu items
Tap the desired menu item.
Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, a new display
opens.
An arrow indicates that additional displays
can be opened.
– Swipe to the left.
– Tap arrow.
The new display opens.
Opening recently used menus
1. Tap on the symbol.
2. Tap on the symbol.
Entering letters and numbers
Input
1. Tap the symbol on the touchscreen.
A keyboard is displayed on the Control
Display.
2. Enter desired letters and numbers.
Deleting
Symbol Function
Tapping the symbol: deletes the
letter or number.
Tapping and holding the symbol
all letters: deletes all letters or
numbers.
Operating navigation map
The navigation map can be moved using the
touchscreen.
Function Operation
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out with the
fingers.
Programmable memory but-
tons
General information
The Central Information Display (CID) func-
tions can be stored on the programmable
memory buttons and called up directly, for
instance radio stations, navigation destina-
tions, phone numbers and menu entries.
Settings are stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Seite 42
AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)
42
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Storing a function
1. Select the function via the Central Infor-
mation Display (CID).
2. Press and hold the desired but-
ton, until a signal sounds.
Executing a function
Press the button.
The function will work immediately.
This means, for instance that the number is
dialed when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the key assignment
Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The assignment of the buttons is displayed
in the upper area of the Control Display.
Deleting the button assignments
1. Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously
for approx. 5 seconds.
2. "OK"
Seite 43
Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE
43
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Voice activation system
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and
functions that are not necessarily available
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Concept
Most functions displayed on the Control
Display can be operated by voice commands
via the voice activation system. The system
supports you with announcements during
input.
General information
– Functions that can only be used when
the vehicle is stationary can only be op-
erated via the voice activation system to
a limited extent.
– The system uses a special microphone
on the driver's side.
– ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes ver-
bal instructions to use with the voice ac-
tivation system.
Functional requirements
– A language must be set via the Control
Display that is supported by the voice
activation system. To set the language,
refer to page 48.
– Always say commands in the language
of the voice activation system.
Using the voice activation sys-
tem
Activating the voice activation
system
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
This symbol indicates that the voice ac-
tivation system is active.
No other commands may be available. In
this case, operate the function via the Cen-
tral Information Display (CID).
Terminating the voice activation
system
Press the button on the steering
wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Possible commands
General information
Most menu items on the Control Display can
be spoken as commands.
Commands from other menus can also be
spoken.
You can also select list entries such as
phone list entries via voice activation. Read
Seite 44
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system
44
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
these list entries out loud exactly as they
are shown in the respective list.
Displaying possible commands
The following is displayed in the top area of
the Control Display:
– Some possible commands for the current
menu.
– Some possible commands from other
menus.
– Status of the voice recognition.
– Encrypted connection is not availa-
ble.
Help on the voice activation system
– ›General information on voice control‹:
have information on the operating prin-
ciple of the voice activation system read
out loud.
– ›Help‹: have help for the current menu
read out loud.
Example: opening the tone set-
tings
The commands of the menu items are spo-
ken just as they are selected via the Con-
troller.
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound out-
put, if needed.
2. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›Media and radio‹
4. ›Tone‹
Adjusting
Setting the language
The language to be used for voice activation
and system announcements can be set.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. If necessary, "Language"
4. "Language:"
5. Select the desired language.
Setting the voice dialog
You can set the system to use standard dia-
log or a short version.
The short version of the voice dialog plays
back short messages in abbreviated form.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Speech mode:"
5. Select the desired setting.
Speaking during voice output
It is possible to answer during inquiries of
the voice activation system. The function
can be deactivated if inquiries are often un-
desirably interrupted, for instance due to
background noise or conversations in the
vehicle.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Speaking during voice output"
Seite 45
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
45
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Activating voice recognition via
the server
The voice recognition feature via the server
provides a dictation function and a natural
method of entering destinations while im-
proving the quality of voice recognition. To
use the functions, data is transmitted to a
service provider via an encrypted connec-
tion and stored locally there.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Language"
4. "Server speech recognition"
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the spoken
instructions until the desired volume is set.
– The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is
changed.
– The volume is stored for the profile cur-
rently used.
Information on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to
initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful
situations, the voice and vocal pitch can
change. This can unnecessarily delay the es-
tablishment of a phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 257, close to the interior mirror.
System limits
– Certain noises can be detected and may
lead to problems. Keep the doors, win-
dows, and glass sunroof closed.
– Noises from the front passenger or the
rear seat bench can impair the system.
Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
– Major language dialects can cause prob-
lems with the voice recognition feature.
Speak loud and clear.
Using the voice activation sys-
tem of the smartphone
A smartphone connected to the vehicle can
be used via voice activation.
Activate voice command response on the
smartphone for this purpose.
1. Press and hold the button on the
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.
Voice command response is activated on
the smartphone.
2. Release the button.
If activation is successful, a confirma-
tion appears on the Control Display.
If it was not possible to activate voice com-
mand response, the list of Bluetooth devices
appears on the Control Display.
Amazon Alexa Car Integration
Concept
Alexa is a digital voice-controlled assistant
by Amazon. With Amazon Alexa Car Inte-
gration, Alexa can be used in the vehicle.
Seite 46
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system
46
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
General information
Some of the Alexa functions are limited in
the vehicle to prevent any impairment of
safety while driving.
Functional requirements
– Connected Voice Services purchased via
MINI Connected Store.
– Same MINI Connected account used in
the vehicle and in the MINI Connected
app.
– Vehicle added in the MINI Connected
app.
– Amazon account and MINI account con-
nected in the MINI Connected app.
– Smartphone connected to the vehicle via
Bluetooth or USB.
Activation in the MINI Connected
app
The Amazon Alexa Car Integration is acti-
vated in the MINI Connected app.
Follow the instructions in the app.
Activation in the vehicle
An authorization for the use of Amazon
Alexa Car Integration is required every time
before starting a trip.
1. Authorizing Amazon Alexa Car Integra-
tion:
– Connect the smartphone to the vehi-
cle via Bluetooth.
– Selects appropriate driver profile, re-
fer to page 75.
2. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
3. Wait for the signal.
4. Say activation word ›Alexa‹ and desired
command.
Information about the active function is
displayed on the Control Display.
Malfunction
In case of a malfunction, switch off the
drive-ready state and restart again.
Seite 47
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
47
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
General settings
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and
functions that are not necessarily available
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Language
Setting the language
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. If necessary, "Language"
4. "Language:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Setting the voice dialog
For voice dialog for the voice activation sys-
tem, refer to page 45.
Time
Setting the time zone
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time zone:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Setting the time
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired
hours are displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
7. Turn the Controller until the desired mi-
nutes are displayed.
8. Press the Controller.
Setting the time format
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time format:"
5. Select the desired setting.
Seite 48
AT A GLANCE General settings
48
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Date
Setting the date
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired day
is displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
7. Make the settings for the month and
year.
Setting the date format
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Date format:"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Setting the units of measure-
ment
You can set the units of measurement for
some values, for example, consumption, dis-
tances and temperature.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Units"
4. Select the desired menu item.
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Activating/deactivating the
display of the current vehicle
position
Concept
If vehicle tracking has been activated, the
current vehicle position can be displayed in
the MINI Connected app.
Activating/deactivating
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Vehicle tracking"
4. "Vehicle tracking"
5. Select the desired setting.
Activating/deactivating
popup windows
For some functions, popup windows are dis-
played automatically on the Control Display.
Some of these popup windows can be acti-
vated or deactivated.
Seite 49
General settings AT A GLANCE
49
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Pop-ups"
4. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Control Display
Brightness
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired
brightness is set.
7. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Depending on the light conditions, the
brightness settings may not be clearly visi-
ble.
Screensaver
If no entries are made via the Central Infor-
mation Display (CID), a screensaver can be
displayed after an adjustable time.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Screensaver"
6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Messages
Concept
The menu centrally displays all messages ar-
riving in the vehicle in list form.
General information
The following messages can be displayed:
– Traffic messages.
– Communication messages, for example
e-mails, SMS text messages or remind-
ers.
– Check Control messages.
– Messages on service notifications.
– Messages from the vehicle manufac-
turer.
Messages are additionally displayed in the
status field.
Retrieving messages
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
The menu in which the message is dis-
played will open.
Deleting messages
All messages, except Check Control mes-
sages or messages from the vehicle manu-
facturer, can be deleted from the list.
Check Control messages or messages from
the vehicle manufacturer are displayed as
long as they are relevant.
Seite 50
AT A GLANCE General settings
50
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "Notifications"
2. Select the desired message.
3. Press the button.
4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all
notifications"
Adjusting
The following settings can be adjusted:
– Select the applications, from which mes-
sages will be permitted.
– Sort the messages according to date or
priority.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Notifications"
4. Select the desired setting.
Data protection
Data transfer
Concept
The vehicle offers various functions which
require data to be transferred to MINI or a
service provider. The data transfer can be
deactivated for some functions.
General information
With data transfer deactivated, the respec-
tive function cannot be used.
Only make these settings while stationary.
Activating/deactivating
Follow the instructions on the Control Dis-
play.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Data privacy"
4. Select the desired setting.
Deleting personal data in the
vehicle
Concept
Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores
personal data, such as stored radio stations.
This personal data can be permanently de-
leted via the Central Information Display
(CID).
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
following data is deleted:
– Driver profile settings.
– Stored radio stations.
– Stored programmable memory buttons.
– Travel and Onboard Computer informa-
tion.
– Music hard disk.
– Navigation, for instance stored destina-
tions.
– Phone book.
– Office data, for instance voice notes.
– Login accounts.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take
up to 15 minutes.
Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Deleting data
Note and follow the instructions on the Con-
trol Display.
Seite 51
General settings AT A GLANCE
51
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Data privacy"
4. "Delete personal data"
5. "Delete personal data"
6. "OK"
7. Exit and lock the vehicle.
The deletion process takes 15 minutes to
complete.
If not all data was deleted, repeat the dele-
tion.
Canceling deletion
Switch on the drive-ready state to cancel
deletion of the data.
Connections
Concept
Various connection types are available for
using mobile devices in the vehicle. The
connection type to select depends on the
mobile device and the desired function.
General information
The following overview shows possible
functions and the suitable connection types
for them. The scope of functions depends on
the mobile device.
Function Connec-
tion type
Making calls via the hands-
free system.
Using phone functions via
the Central Information Dis-
play (CID).
Using the smartphone Of-
fice functions.
Bluetooth.
Playing music from the
smartphone or the audio
player.
Bluetooth
or USB.
Using compatible apps via
the Central Information Dis-
play (CID).
Bluetooth
or USB.
USB storage device:
Exporting and importing
driver profiles.
Update the software.
Playing music.
USB.
Playing videos from the
smartphone or the USB de-
vice.
USB.
Using Apple CarPlay apps
via the Central Information
Display (CID) and voice op-
eration.
Bluetooth
and
WLAN.
The following connection types require one-
time pairing with the vehicle:
– Bluetooth.
– Apple CarPlay
Paired devices are automatically recognized
later on and connected to the vehicle.
Seite 52
AT A GLANCE General settings
52
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Safety information
Warning
Operating the integrated information sys-
tems and communication devices while
driving can distract from traffic. It is pos-
sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is
a risk of accident. Only use the systems or
devices when the traffic situation allows.
As warranted, stop and use the systems
and devices while the vehicle is stationary.
Compatible devices
General information
Malfunctions may occur with devices not
listed or deviating software versions.
Displaying the vehicle identification
number and software part number
When looking for compatible devices, you
may have to state the vehicle identification
number and the software part number.
These numbers can be displayed in the ve-
hicle.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth® info"
6. "System information"
A software update, refer to page 58, can
be performed.
Bluetooth connection
Functional requirements
– Compatible device, refer to page 53,
with Bluetooth interface.
– The vehicle key is in the vehicle.
– The device is ready for operation.
– Bluetooth is activated on the device and
in the vehicle, refer to page 53.
– Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility,
may be required on the device; refer to
the owner's manual of the device.
Switching on Bluetooth
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth®"
Activating/deactivating telephone
functions
To use all supported functions of a mobile
phone, the following functions must be acti-
vated prior to pairing.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the desired setting:
– "Office"
Activate function to transmit short
messages, e-mails, calendars, tasks,
notes, and reminders to the vehicle.
Costs can be incurred by transmit-
ting all data to the vehicle.
– "Contact images"
Activate function to show the con-
tact pictures.
6. Move the Controller to the left.
Seite 53
General settings AT A GLANCE
53
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Pairing the mobile device with the
vehicle
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
5. Select the functions for which the de-
vice will be used:
– "Telephone"
– "Bluetooth® audio"
– "Apps"
– "Apple CarPlay"
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is dis-
played on the Control Display.
6. On the mobile device, search for Blue-
tooth devices in the vicinity.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap-
pears on the mobile device display.
Select the Bluetooth name of the vehi-
cle.
7. Depending on the mobile device, a con-
trol number is displayed or the control
number must be entered.
– Compare the control number dis-
played on the Control Display with
the control number on the display of
the device.
Confirm the control number on the
device and on the Control Display.
– Enter and confirm the same control
number on the device and via the
Central Information Display (CID).
The device is connected and displayed
in the device list.
If connection was not successful: Fre-
quently Asked Questions, refer to page 54.
Frequently Asked Questions
All requirements are met and all required
steps were completed in the specified order.
Despite that, the mobile device does not
function as expected.
In this case, the following explanations can
help:
Why could the mobile phone not be paired
or connected?
– There are too many Bluetooth devices
connected to the mobile phone or vehi-
cle.
In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connec-
tions with other devices.
Delete all known Bluetooth connections
from the device list on the mobile phone
and start a new device search.
– The mobile phone is in power-save mode
or has only a limited remaining battery
life.
Charge the mobile phone.
Why does the mobile phone no longer re-
act?
– The applications on the mobile phone do
not function anymore.
Switch the mobile phone off and on
again.
– Possibly too high or too low ambient
temperatures for mobile phone opera-
tion.
Do not subject the mobile phone to ex-
treme ambient temperatures.
Why can phone functions not be used via
the Central Information Display (CID)?
– The mobile phone may not be properly
configured, for instance as Bluetooth au-
dio device.
Connect the mobile phone with the tele-
phone or additional phone function.
Why are no or not all phone book entries
displayed or why are they incomplete?
Seite 54
AT A GLANCE General settings
54
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
– Transmission of the phone book entries
is not yet complete.
– It is possible that only the phone book
entries of the mobile phone or the SIM
card are transmitted.
– It may not be possible to display phone
book entries with special characters.
– It may not be possible to transmit con-
tacts from social networks.
– The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
– Data volume of the contact too large, for
instance due to stored information such
as notes.
Reduce the data volume of the contact.
– A mobile phone is only connected as an
audio source.
Reconfigure the mobile phone and con-
nect it with the telephone or additional
phone function.
How can the phone connection quality be
improved?
– The strength of the Bluetooth signal on
the mobile phone can be adjusted, de-
pending on the mobile phone.
– Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in
adapter or place it in the area of the cen-
ter console.
– Insert the mobile phone into the wire-
less charging tray.
– Adjust the volume of the microphone
and loudspeakers separately.
If all points in this list have been checked
and the required function is still not availa-
ble, contact the hotline, a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
USB connection
General information
The following mobile devices can be con-
nected to the USB port:
– Mobile phones.
The snap-in adapter features a separate
USB port that is automatically connected
when a compatible mobile phone is in-
serted.
– Audio devices with USB port, for in-
stance MP3 players.
– USB storage devices.
Common file systems are supported.
FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended
formats.
A connected USB storage device will be
supplied with charge current via the USB
port if the device supports this. Follow the
maximum charge current of the USB port.
The following uses are possible on USB
ports with data transfer:
– Exporting and importing driver profiles,
refer to page 75.
– Playing music files via USB audio.
– Playing videos via USB video.
– Loading of software updates, refer to
page 58.
Follow the following when connecting:
– Do not use force when plugging the con-
nector into the USB port.
– Use a flexible adapter cable.
– Protect the USB storage device against
mechanical damage.
– Due to the large number of USB storage
devices available on the market, it can-
not be guaranteed that every device is
operable on the vehicle.
– Do not expose USB storage devices to
extreme environmental conditions, such
Seite 55
General settings AT A GLANCE
55
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
as very high temperatures; refer to the
owner's manual of the device.
– Due to the many different compression
techniques, proper playback of the me-
dia stored on the USB storage device
cannot be guaranteed in all cases.
– To ensure proper transmission of the
stored data, do not charge a USB storage
device via the onboard socket, when it
is connected to the USB port.
– Depending on how the USB storage de-
vice is being used, settings may be re-
quired on the USB storage device, refer
to the owner's manual of the device.
Not compatible USB media:
– USB hard drives.
– USB hubs.
– USB memory card readers with multiple
slots.
– HFS-formatted USB storage devices.
– Devices such as fans or lamps.
Functional requirement
Compatible device, refer to page 53, with
USB port.
Connecting the device
Connect the USB device using a suitable
adapter cable to a USB port, refer to
page 194.
The USB device is connected to the vehicle
and displayed in the device list.
Apple CarPlay preparation
Concept
CarPlay allows certain functions of a com-
patible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri
voice operation and the Central Information
Display (CID).
Functional requirements
– Compatible iPhone, refer to page 53.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
– Corresponding mobile contract.
– Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice opera-
tion are activated on the iPhone.
– Booking the MINI Connected service:
Apple CarPlay preparation.
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the following settings:
– "Bluetooth®"
– "Apple CarPlay"
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay
Pairing an iPhone with the vehicle, refer to
page 54, via Bluetooth
Select CarPlay as the function:
"Apple CarPlay"
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and
displayed in the device list, refer to
page 57.
Operation
For more information, refer to the
Integrated Owner's Manual or the Owner's
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-
munication.
Frequently Asked Questions
All requirements are met and all required
steps were completed in the specified order.
Despite that, the mobile device does not
function as expected.
Seite 56
AT A GLANCE General settings
56
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
In this case, the following explanations can
help:
The iPhone has already been paired with
Apple CarPlay. When a new connection is
established, CarPlay can no longer be se-
lected.
– Delete the iPhone concerned from the
device list.
– On the iPhone, delete the vehicle con-
cerned from the list of stored vehicles
under Bluetooth and under WLAN.
– Pair the iPhone as a new device.
If the steps listed have been carried out and
the required function is still not available:
contact the hotline, a dealer's service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Managing mobile devices
General information
– After one-time pairing, the devices are
automatically recognized and recon-
nected when standby state is switched
on.
– The data stored on the SIM card or in
the mobile phone is transferred to the
vehicle after recognition.
– For some devices, certain settings may
be necessary, for instance authorization,
see owner's manual of the device.
Displaying the device list
All devices paired and/or connected with
the vehicle are displayed in the device list.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
A symbol indicates, for which function a de-
vice is used.
Symbol Function
"Telephone"
"Additional telephone"
"Bluetooth® audio"
"Apps"
"Apple CarPlay"
Configuring the device
Functions can be activated or deactivated
for paired and connected devices.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select the desired device.
5. Select the desired setting.
If a function is assigned to a device, the
function will be deactivated where appro-
priate for a device that is already connected
and the device will be disconnected.
Disconnecting the device
The device's connection to the vehicle is
disconnected.
The device remains paired and can be con-
nected again, refer to page 57.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Disconnect device"
Connecting the device
A disconnected device can be reconnected.
Seite 57
General settings AT A GLANCE
57
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Connect device"
The functions that were assigned to the de-
vice before disconnecting are assigned to
the device when it is reconnected. The func-
tions may be deactivated on a device al-
ready connected.
Deleting the device
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device.
5. "Delete device"
The device is disconnected and removed
from the device list.
Swapping the telephone and additional
phone
If two mobile phones are connected to the
vehicle, the functions of the phone and ad-
ditional phone can be switched.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. "Swap telephone/additional tel."
Software update
General information
The vehicle supports a large number of mo-
bile devices, for example mobile phones and
MP3 players. Software updates are available
for many of the supported devices. The ve-
hicle is kept up-to-date via regular vehicle
software updates.
Contact a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop for
information on available software updates.
Displaying the version of the installed
software
The software version installed in the vehicle
is displayed.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Show current version"
If an update has been carried out before, se-
lect the desired version to display additional
information.
Updating software via USB
The software may only be updated when the
vehicle is stationary.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. Store the file for the software update in
the main directory of a USB storage de-
vice.
2. Connecting USB storage devices to the
USB port.
3. "My MINI"
4. "System settings"
5. "Software update"
6. "Update software"
Seite 58
AT A GLANCE General settings
58
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
7. "USB"
8. "Install software"
9. "OK"
10. Wait for the update to complete.
11. Confirm system restart.
Restoring the software version
You can restore the software to the version
prior to the last update or to its factory set-
tings.
The software may only be restored when
the vehicle is stationary.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Software update"
4. "Restore software"
5.
– "Previous version"
The previous software version is re-
stored.
– "Default software settings"
The first software version is re-
stored.
6. "Remove software"
7. "OK"
8. Wait for restore.
9. Confirm system restart.
Seite 59
General settings AT A GLANCE
59
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Owner's Manual media
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and
functions that are not necessarily available
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
General information
You can use the following media formats to
call up the content in the Owner's Manual:
– Printed Owner's Manual, refer to
page 60.
– Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi-
cle, refer to page 60.
Printed Owner's Manual
Concept
The printed Owner's Manual describes all
standard, country-specific, and optional fea-
tures offered with the series.
General information
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter-
tainment, and Communication can be ob-
tained as a printed book from the service
center.
Supplementary Owner's Manuals
Also follow the Supplementary Owner's
Manuals, which are included in addition to
the onboard literature.
Integrated Owner's Manual in
the vehicle
Concept
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically
describes features and functions found in
the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual
can be displayed on the Control Display.
Selecting the Owner's Manual
1. Press the button.
2. "My MINI"
3. "Owner's Manual"
4. Select the desired method of accessing
the contents.
Scrolling through the Owner's
Manual
Turn the Controller, until the next or previ-
ous contents are displayed.
Context help
General information
The section of the Owner's Manual relating
to the function that is currently selected
can be displayed directly.
Seite 60
AT A GLANCE Owner's Manual media
60
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Opening via Central Information
Display (CID)
Change directly to the Options menu from
the function on the Control Display:
1. Press the button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on
the Control Display:
"Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the
Owner's Manual
To switch from a function, for instance
radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control
Display and to alternate between the two
displays:
1. Press the button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4. Press the button again to return to
the last displayed function.
5. Press the button to return to the
page of the Owner's Manual displayed
last.
To alternate continuously between the last
displayed function and the last displayed
page of the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4
& 5. Opens a new display every time.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The Owner's Manual can be stored on the
programmable memory buttons and called
up directly.
Storing
1. Select the desired entry point via the
Central Information Display (CID):
– "Quick reference"
– "Search by pictures"
– "Keyword search"
– "Animations"
2. Press and hold the desired but-
ton, until a signal sounds.
Executing
Press the button.
The Owner's Manual is displayed
immediately.
Seite 61
Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE
61
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
MINI eDRIVE
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and
functions that are not necessarily available
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
General information
This MINI is an electric vehicle. The vehicle
features a high-voltage system that consists
of an electric motor and a high-voltage bat-
tery among other things.
The eDRIVE system exhibits the following
special features:
– The vehicle is operated emissions free
using its electrical drive system.
– The special high-voltage battery sup-
plies the electric motor as well as the
comfort features with power.
– The high-voltage battery is charged via
a charging cable, for instance when
parked or while driving by energy recov-
ery.
– The vehicle can be charged very rapidly
at special charging stations. Charging is
also possible at household power sock-
ets.
– On the go, the energy recovery ensures
that only little energy is lost when brak-
ing.
– When the vehicle decelerates, the elec-
tric motor acts as a generator and con-
verts the kinetic energy released into
electric current.
– As a result the high-voltage battery is
partially recharged in order to reach
maximum range.
Overview
1 Drive unit
2 Vehicle battery
3 High-voltage cables
4 Charging socket
5 High-voltage battery
Functions
Electric driving: eDRIVE
The vehicle is powered exclusively by the
electric motor. The accelerator pedal can be
used not just for acceleration, but also for
deceleration. When the vehicle decelerates,
the electric motor acts as a generator and
charges the high-voltage battery. With a
sensible driving style, this function can be
used for especially efficient energy recov-
ery and comfortable driving, using just the
accelerator pedal.
Seite 62
AT A GLANCE MINI eDRIVE
62
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Acoustic pedestrian protection
The system generates a continuous driving
noise during electric driving at low speeds.
Coasting
An especially efficient operating point is so-
called coasting. In this case, the vehicle is
decelerated only by driving resistance and
no energy flows between high-voltage bat-
tery and electric motor. In order to coast,
depress the accelerator pedal far enough so
that the pointer in the performance display,
refer to page 120, is between the areas for
ePOWER and CHARGE.
Energy recovery: CHARGE
The high-voltage battery is charged while
driving through energy recovery.
The electric motor acts as a generator and
converts the kinetic energy of the vehicle
into electrical energy.
Charging can take place in various situa-
tions while the vehicle is in motion:
– As soon as the accelerator pedal is only
slightly depressed.
– As soon as the accelerator pedal is not
depressed.
The pointer in the instrument cluster is lo-
cated in the CHARGE area.
Sensible driving and early speed reduction
are important to make full use of the energy
recovery feature.
Display
The eDRIVE displays, refer to page 120,
provide information about the current state
of the drive and visualize the system's use
in a diagram.
Energy-saving driving and
maximizing the range
Energy-saving driving is the basic prerequi-
site for as large a range as possible. eDRIVE
provides various functions that assist with
an energy-saving driving style and help to
monitor the range, and if needed, to in-
crease it. The following descriptions provide
an overview of the available functions and
the personal measures.
Before driving
eDRIVE allows use of the air conditioner
even before driving off. The stationary cli-
mate control, refer to page 184, provides
more range than using full air conditioning
while driving.
Parked vehicle ventilation during the charg-
ing process can provide maximum range
when driving off.
Trip planning and special functions
of the navigation system
Several special functions of the navigation
system support trip planning taking into ac-
count the electric range:
– Range assistant, refer to Integrated
Owner's Manual, checks whether an en-
tered navigation destination can be
reached. If the range is not sufficient,
various recommendations to help in-
crease the range are displayed automati-
cally, for instance, a consumption opti-
mized route based on driving in GREEN
Mode is displayed.
– Range map indicates the action range
on the navigation map, refer to
Integrated Owner's Manual.
– Charging assistant under Points of In-
terest in navigation, helps to find and
possibly include a public charging sta-
Seite 63
MINI eDRIVE AT A GLANCE
63
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
tion in the desired route, refer to
Integrated Owner's Manual.
During driving
– General driving tips, refer to page 212,
for increasing the range.
– Use the eDRIVE system efficiently, refer
to page 213, for an optimized driving
style.
– MINIMALISM Analyzer, refer to
page 216, to analyze the driving style.
– GREEN and GREEN +, refer to
page 214, driving mode for increasing
the range.
– Information about auxiliary users and
the range potential, refer to page 121.
After the trip
– Charge vehicle, refer to page 218, and
plan next trip.
– Prepare for long downtimes, refer to
page 266.
MINI Connected
The MINI Connected app provides mobility-
based services and applications.
Safety of the high-voltage sys-
tem
Follow the information on safety, refer to
page 65.
Operating noises
Operating noises may occur due to the elec-
trical system. For instance, they may occur
in the following situations:
– When cooling the high-voltage battery
during the charging process.
– When cooling the high-voltage battery
with the drive-ready state switched on.
– When climatizing the car's interior.
Long-term vehicle storage
Observe the information on vehicle storage
and for longer idle periods, refer to
page 266.
Seite 64
AT A GLANCE MINI eDRIVE
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Safety of the high-voltage system
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and
functions that are not necessarily available
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Working on the vehicle
General information
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends that no changes be made to the vehi-
cle, for instance the retrofitting of accesso-
ries, that will have an effect on the vehicle’s
hybrid system.
Safety information
DANGER
Improperly performed work, in particular
maintenance and repair on the high-volt-
age system, can lead to electric shock.
There is a risk of injury, fire and danger to
life.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends that the work on the vehicle, in par-
ticular maintenance and repair, be per-
formed by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Contact with water
The high-voltage system is typically safe
even in the following example situations:
– Water in the floor area, for instance af-
ter a rainstorm when the window was
kept open.
– Vehicle is in water but only up to the al-
lowed height.
– Fluid escapes in the cargo area.
Automatic deactivation
If an accident occurs, the high-voltage sys-
tem is switched off automatically to prevent
risk of danger to occupants and other traf-
fic.
Read the information on What to do after
an accident, refer to page 261.
Seite 65
Safety of the high-voltage system AT A GLANCE
65
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Opening and closing
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and
functions that are not necessarily available
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Vehicle key
General information
The vehicle is supplied with two vehicle
keys with integrated key.
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat-
tery, refer to page 69.
Depending on the equipment and country
version, various settings, refer to page 78,
can be configured for the button functions.
A personal driver profile, refer to page 75,
for each vehicle key is stored in the vehicle.
To provide information on maintenance re-
quirements, the service data is stored in the
vehicle key, refer to page 248.
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle
key, take the vehicle key with you when ex-
iting the vehicle.
Safety information
Warning
People or animals in the vehicle can lock
the doors from the inside and lock them-
selves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot
be opened from the outside. There is a risk
of injury. Take the vehicle key with you so
that the vehicle can be opened from the
outside.
Warning
Unlocking from the inside is only possible
with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the
vehicle while being exposed to extreme
temperatures are at risk of injury or death.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
when there are people in it.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the ve-
hicle can cause the vehicle to move and
endanger themselves and traffic, for in-
stance due to the following actions:
– Pressing the Start/Stop button.
– Releasing the parking brake.
– Opening and closing the doors or
windows.
– Engaging selector lever position N.
– Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do
not leave children or animals unattended
in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with
you when exiting and lock the vehicle.
Seite 66
CONTROLS Opening and closing
66
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Overview
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Unlocking the tailgate
4 Panic mode
Unlocking
Press the button on the vehicle key.
Depending on the settings, refer to
page 78, the following access points are
unlocked.
– Driver's door.
Press the button on the vehicle key
again to unlock the other vehicle access
points.
– All doors and tailgate.
In addition, the following functions are exe-
cuted:
– Unlocking is confirmed by the turn sig-
nals and the horn. This function must be
activated in the settings, refer to
page 78.
– The settings stored in the driver profile,
refer to page 75, are applied.
– The interior lights, refer to page 139,
and the MINI logo projection are
switched on, provided that the interior
lights were not switched off manually.
– Depending on the settings, the welcome
light and pathway lighting, refer to
page 136, are switched on.
– Exterior mirrors folded through conven-
ient closing are folded open.
– The alarm system, refer to page 79, is
switched off.
The light functions may depend on the am-
bient brightness.
Convenient opening
Press and hold the button on the ve-
hicle key after unlocking.
The windows and the glass sunroof are
opened, as long as the button on the vehicle
key is pressed.
Locking
1. Close the driver's door.
2. Press the button on the vehicle
key.
The following functions are executed:
– All doors and the tailgate are locked.
– Locking is confirmed by the turn signals
and the horn. This function must be ac-
tivated in the settings, refer to
page 78.
– The alarm system, refer to page 79, is
switched on.
If the drive-ready state is still switched on
when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn
honks twice. In this case, the drive-ready
state must be switched off by means of the
Start/Stop button.
Seite 67
Opening and closing CONTROLS
67
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
With Comfort Access: convenient
closing
Safety information
Warning
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the
doors is clear during convenient closing.
Closing
Press and hold the button on the ve-
hicle key in the area close to the ve-
hicle.
The windows and the glass sunroof are
closed, as long as the button on the vehicle
key is pressed.
The exterior mirrors are folded in.
Switch on interior lights and
courtesy light
Press the button on the vehicle key
with the vehicle locked.
The MINI logo projection is also switched
on.
These functions are not available if the inte-
rior lights were switched off manually.
The light functions may depend on the am-
bient brightness.
After locking, wait 10 seconds before press-
ing the button again.
Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-
cle, do not place the remote control in the
cargo area.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and
country version, it is possible to specify
whether the tailgate can be unlocked with
the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors
will respond to this. To perform settings, re-
fer to page 78.
Safety information
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tail-
gate is clear during opening and closing.
NOTICE
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Make sure that the area of movement
of the tailgate is clear during opening and
closing.
NOTICE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
windows and heat conductors while driv-
ing. There is a risk of damage to property.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed
objects do not hit the windows.
Opening
Press and hold the button on the ve-
hicle key for approx. 1 second.
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung
upward.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Seite 68
CONTROLS Opening and closing
68
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
– Press the button on the vehicle
key and hold for at least 3 sec-
onds.
– Briefly press the button on the vehicle
key three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Replacing the battery
1. Remove the integrated key from the ve-
hicle key, refer to page 71.
2. Slide the integrated key into the open-
ing and raise the cover.
The battery compartment is accessible.
3. Slide the integrated key in the cover of
the battery compartment and raise the
cover.
4. Push battery in the direction of the ar-
row using a pointed object and lift it
out.
5. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the
positive side facing up.
6. Insert lid and cover.
7. Push the integrated key into the vehicle
key until it engages.
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair
shop or take them to a collection point.
Additional vehicle keys
Additional vehicle keys are available from a
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Loss of vehicle keys
A lost vehicle key can be blocked and re-
placed by a dealer’s service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circum-
stances:
Seite 69
Opening and closing CONTROLS
69
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
– The battery of the vehicle key is dis-
charged. For replacing the battery, refer
to page 69.
– Interference of the radio connection
from transmission towers or other
equipment with high transmitting
power.
– Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal
objects.
Do not transport the vehicle key to-
gether with metal objects.
– Interference of the radio connection
from mobile phones or other electronic
devices in direct proximity to the vehi-
cle key.
Do not transport the vehicle key to-
gether with electronic devices.
– Interference of radio transmission by a
charging process of mobile devices, for
instance charging of a mobile phone.
– The vehicle key is in direct proximity of
the wireless charging tray.
Place the vehicle key in a different loca-
tion.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can
be unlocked and locked from the outside
with the integrated key, refer to page 70.
Switching on the drive-ready state via
emergency detection of the vehicle
key
It is not possible to switch on the drive-
ready state if the vehicle key has not been
detected.
Proceed as follows in this case:
1. Hold the vehicle key against the mark
on the steering column as shown. Pay
attention to the display in the instru-
ment cluster.
2. If the vehicle key is detected:
Switch on drive-ready state within
10 seconds.
If the vehicle key is not recognized, slightly
change the position of the vehicle key and
repeat the procedure.
Frequently Asked Questions
What precautions can be taken to be able to
open a vehicle with an accidentally locked
in vehicle key?
– The options provided by the Remote
Services of the MINI Connected app in-
clude the ability to lock and unlock a ve-
hicle.
This requires an active MINI Connected
contract and the MINI Connected app
must be installed on a smartphone.
– Unlocking the vehicle can be requested
via the MINI Connected Call Center.
An active MINI Connected contract is
required.
Integrated key
General information
The driver's door can be locked and un-
locked without the vehicle key using the
integrated key.
Seite 70
CONTROLS Opening and closing
70
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Safety information
Warning
Unlocking from the inside is only possible
with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the
vehicle while being exposed to extreme
temperatures are at risk of injury or death.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
when there are people in it.
NOTICE
The door lock is permanently joined with
the door. The door handle can be moved.
When pulling the door handle with the
integrated key inserted, paint or the
integrated key can be damaged. There is a
risk of damage to property. Remove the
integrated key before pulling the outside
door handle.
Removing
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
integrated key, arrow 2.
Locking/unlocking via the door
lock
1. Remove lid on the door lock.
To do this, slide the integrated key into
the opening from below and remove the
lid.
2. Unlock or lock the door lock using the
integrated key.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
from the inside.
Alarm system
The alarm system is not switched on if the
vehicle is locked with the integrated key.
The alarm system is triggered when the
door is opened, if the vehicle has been un-
locked via the door lock.
Buttons for the central locking
system
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehi-
cle is automatically unlocked. The hazard
warning system and interior lights come on.
Seite 71
Opening and closing CONTROLS
71
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Overview
Buttons for the central locking system.
Locking
The vehicle is not secured against theft
when locking.
Unlocking
Press the button.
Opening
– Press button to unlock the doors
together, and then pull the door handle
above the armrest.
Comfort Access
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without operat-
ing the vehicle key.
Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in
your pants pocket, is sufficient.
The vehicle automatically detects the vehi-
cle key when it is in close proximity or in
the car's interior.
General information
Comfort Access supports the following
functions:
– Unlocking and locking the vehicle.
– Convenient closing.
– Open the tailgate.
Functional requirements
– To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must
be outside of the vehicle near the doors.
– The next unlocking and locking cycle is
not possible until after approx. 2 sec-
onds.
Unlocking
On the driver's or front passenger's outer
door handle, press the button.
Depending on the settings, refer to
page 78, only the driver's door may be un-
locked. Unlike when unlocking using the ve-
hicle key, pressing the button on the outer
door handle again does not unlock the other
vehicle access points. Rather, the vehicle is
locked again.
If the vehicle was locked automatically after
driving off or with the button of the central
locking system from the inside, note the fol-
lowing: if a door on a locked vehicle is
opened from the inside with the door
opener, pressing the button on the outer
door handle will first lock the vehicle again.
To unlock, the button on the outer door han-
dle must be pressed again.
Seite 72
CONTROLS Opening and closing
72
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Locking
On the driver's or front passenger's outer
door handle, press the button.
Convenient closing
Safety information
Warning
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the
doors is clear during convenient closing.
Closing
Press and hold down the button on the driv-
er's or front passenger's outer door handle.
In addition to locking, the windows and
glass sunroof will be closed.
The exterior mirrors are folded in.
To open the tailgate
General information
If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access,
locked doors are not unlocked.
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-
cle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo
area.
Safety information
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tail-
gate is clear during opening and closing.
NOTICE
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Make sure that the area of movement
of the tailgate is clear during opening and
closing.
NOTICE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
windows and heat conductors while driv-
ing. There is a risk of damage to property.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed
objects do not hit the windows.
Seite 73
Opening and closing CONTROLS
73
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Opening
Press button next on tailgate.
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung
upward.
Malfunction
Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circum-
stances:
– The battery of the vehicle key is dis-
charged. For replacing the battery, refer
to page 69.
– Interference of the radio connection
from transmission towers or other
equipment with high transmitting
power.
– Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal
objects.
Do not transport the vehicle key to-
gether with metal objects.
– Interference of the radio connection
from mobile phones or other electronic
devices in direct proximity to the vehi-
cle key.
Do not transport the vehicle key to-
gether with electronic devices.
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the
locking request recognition function on the
door handles.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and
lock the vehicle using the buttons of the ve-
hicle key or use the integrated key, refer to
page 70.
Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-
cle, do not place the remote control in the
cargo area.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and
country version, it is possible to specify
whether the tailgate can be unlocked with
the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors
will respond to this. To perform settings, re-
fer to page 78.
Safety information
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tail-
gate is clear during opening and closing.
NOTICE
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Make sure that the area of movement
of the tailgate is clear during opening and
closing.
NOTICE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
windows and heat conductors while driv-
ing. There is a risk of damage to property.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed
objects do not hit the windows.
Seite 74
CONTROLS Opening and closing
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Opening and closing
Opening from the outside
– Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehi-
cle or have the vehicle key with you.
Press button next on tailgate.
– Press and hold the button on the
vehicle key for approx. 1 second.
Depending on the setting, the doors may
also be unlocked. Unlocking with the ve-
hicle key, refer to page 68.
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung
upward.
Opening from the inside
With Steptronic transmission:
With the vehicle stationary, press
the button in the driver's floor area.
If the vehicle is locked, selector lever posi-
tion P must be engaged first.
With manual transmission:
With the vehicle stationary, press
the button in the driver's floor area twice in
quick succession.
Closing
Recessed grips on the interior trim of the
tailgate can be used to conveniently pull
down the tailgate.
Driver profiles
Concept
In the driver profiles, individual settings for
several drivers can be stored and called up
again when required.
General information
There are three driver profiles with which
personal vehicle settings can be stored. Ev-
ery vehicle key has been assigned one of
these driver profiles.
If the vehicle is unlocked using the vehicle
key, the assigned personal driver profile will
be activated. All settings stored in the
driver profile are automatically applied.
If several drivers use their own vehicle
keys, the vehicle will apply the personal set-
tings as it is being unlocked. These settings
are also restored, if the vehicle has been
used in the meantime by a person with a
different vehicle key.
Changes to the settings are automatically
stored in the driver profile currently acti-
vated.
If another driver profile is selected via the
Central Information Display (CID), the set-
Seite 75
Opening and closing CONTROLS
75
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
tings stored in it will be applied automati-
cally. The new driver profile is assigned to
the vehicle key that is currently in use.
There is an additional guest profile available
that is not assigned to any vehicle key: it
can be used to apply settings in the vehicle
without changing the personal driver pro-
files.
Functional requirements
For the system to be able to identify the
driver profile associated to a particular
driver, the detected vehicle key must be
clearly allocated to the driver.
This is the case when:
– The driver is only carrying his or her
own vehicle key.
– The driver unlocks the vehicle.
– The driver gets into the vehicle through
the driver's door.
Adjusting
The settings for the following systems and
functions are stored in the active profile.
The scope of storable settings depends on
country and equipment.
– Unlocking and locking.
– Lights.
– Radio.
– Instrument cluster.
– Programmable memory buttons.
– Volumes, tone.
– Control Display.
– Climate control.
– Navigation.
– PDC Park Distance Control.
– Rearview camera.
– Head-up Display.
– MINI Driving Modes.
– Intelligent Safety.
Profile management
Selecting a driver profile
Regardless of the vehicle key in use, a dif-
ferent driver profile may be activated. This
allows you to call up personal vehicle set-
tings, even if you did not unlock the vehicle
with your own vehicle key.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
4. "OK"
– All settings stored in the selected driver
profile are automatically applied.
– The called-up driver profile is assigned
to the vehicle key being used at the
time.
– If the driver profile is already assigned
to a different vehicle key, this driver
profile will apply to both vehicle keys.
Using a guest profile
The guest profile is for individual settings
that are stored in none of the three personal
driver profiles.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Drive off (guest)"
4. "OK"
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is
assigned to the vehicle key that is not used
at the time.
Renaming a driver profile
A personal name can be assigned to the ac-
tive driver profile to avoid confusion be-
tween the driver profiles.
Seite 76
CONTROLS Opening and closing
76
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this
symbol can be renamed.
4. "Change driver profile name"
5. Enter profile name.
6. Select the symbol.
Resetting a driver profile
The settings of the driver profile currently
in use are reset to their factory settings.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this
symbol can be reset.
4. "Reset driver profile"
5. "OK"
Exporting driver profiles
Most settings of the active driver profile
can be exported.
Exporting is helpful when storing and re-
trieving personal settings, for instance be-
fore delivering the vehicle to a workshop.
The stored driver profiles can be taken into
another vehicle.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
The driver profile marked with this
symbol can be exported.
4. "Export driver profile (USB)"
Select USB storage device as needed.
Importing driver profiles
Profiles stored on a USB storage device can
be imported via the USB port.
The existing settings of the active driver
profile are overwritten with the settings of
the imported driver profile.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select the driver profile to overwrite.
The driver profile marked with this
symbol can be overwritten.
4. "Import driver profile (USB)"
Select USB storage device as needed.
5. Select the driver profile to be imported.
Displaying driver profiles during start
The driver profiles can be displayed at each
startup to select the desired profile.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Show driver profiles at startup"
System limits
A clear assignment between the vehicle key
and driver may not be possible in the fol-
lowing cases, for example.
– The passenger unlocks the vehicle with
his or her own vehicle key, but another
person is driving.
– The driver unlocks the vehicle via Com-
fort Access and has multiple vehicle
keys with him or her.
– The driver changes, but the vehicle is
not locked and unlocked.
Seite 77
Opening and closing CONTROLS
77
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
– Multiple vehicle keys are located out-
side of the vehicle.
Adjusting
General information
Depending on the package and country ver-
sion, various settings are available for the
vehicle key functions.
These settings are stored for the driver pro-
file, refer to page 75, currently used.
Unlocking
Doors
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Driver's door" or "All doors"
5. Select the desired setting:
– "Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door is unlocked.
Pressing again unlocks the entire ve-
hicle.
– "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Tailgate
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4.
The text next to the symbol indicates
the current setting.
5. Select the desired setting:
– "Tailgate"
Only the tailgate is unlocked.
– "Tailgate and door(s)"
The tailgate and the doors are un-
locked.
– "Tailgate opens after unlocking"
The vehicle must be unlocked before
the tailgate can be used with the ve-
hicle key.
– "Button lock"
It is not possible to use the tailgate
via the vehicle key.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and
country version, this setting may not be of-
fered.
Automatic locking
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Select the desired setting:
– "Lock automatically"
The vehicle locks automatically after
a while if no door is opened after un-
locking.
– "Lock after starting to drive"
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive off.
Automatic unlocking
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. "Unlock at end of trip"
Seite 78
CONTROLS Opening and closing
78
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
After drive-ready state is switched off
by pressing the Start/Stop button, the
locked vehicle is automatically un-
locked.
Confirmation signals from the
vehicle
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Deactivate or activate the desired con-
firmation signals.
– "Flash for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes,
locking by one.
– With alarm system:
"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by one honk of
the horn.
Alarm system
General information
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle
alarm system reacts to the following
changes:
– Unauthorized opening of a door, the
hood or the tailgate.
– Movements in the car's interior.
– Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance,
during attempts at stealing a wheel or
when towing the vehicle.
– Disconnected battery voltage.
– Improper use of the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis.
– Locking the vehicle while a device is
connected to the socket for the OBD On-
board-Diagnosis. For socket for the OBD
Onboard Diagnosis, refer to page 249.
The alarm system signals these changes vis-
ually and acoustically:
– Acoustic alarm:
Depending on local regulations, the
acoustic alarm may be suppressed.
– Visual alarm:
By flashing of the hazard warning sys-
tem and headlights, where required.
Do not modify the system to ensure func-
tion of the alarm system.
Overview
Indicator light on the interior mirror.
Switching on/off
The alarm system is switched on or off as
soon as the vehicle is locked with the vehi-
cle key or unlocked or locked via Comfort
Access.
Opening the doors with the alarm
system switched on
The alarm system is triggered when a door
is opened if the door was unlocked using
the integrated key in the door lock.
Switching off the alarm, refer to page 80.
Seite 79
Opening and closing CONTROLS
79
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Opening the tailgate with the alarm
system switched on
The tailgate can be opened even when the
alarm system is switched on.
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and
monitored again provided the doors are
locked. The hazard warning system flashes
once.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
– Press the button on the vehicle
key and hold for at least 3 sec-
onds.
– Briefly press the button on the vehicle
key three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Signals of the indicator light
– The indicator light flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The alarm system is switched on.
– Indicator light flashes for approx.
10 seconds, then it flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm
sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or
tailgate are not correctly closed. Cor-
rectly closed access points are secured.
When the still open access points are
closed, the interior motion sensor and
tilt alarm sensor will be switched on.
– The indicator light goes out after un-
locking:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
– The indicator light flashes after unlock-
ing until standby state is switched on,
but no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations
such as attempts to steal a wheel or when
the vehicle is towed.
Interior motion sensor
The windows and the glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion
sensor can trigger an alarm, although no un-
authorized action occurred.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
– In automatic vehicle washes.
– In duplex garages.
– During transport on trains carrying ve-
hicles, at sea or on a trailer.
– With animals in the vehicle.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior mo-
tion sensor can be switched off in such sit-
uations.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the button on the vehicle key
within 10 seconds as soon as the
vehicle is locked.
The indicator light lights up for approx.
2 seconds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion
sensor are switched off until the vehicle is
locked again.
Switching off the alarm
– Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key.
Seite 80
CONTROLS Opening and closing
80
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
– Unlock the vehicle with the integrated
key and activate the standby state via
emergency detection of the vehicle key,
refer to page 69.
– With Comfort Access: if you have the
vehicle key with you, unlock the vehicle
using the button on the driver's side or
passenger side door.
Power windows
General information
If an accident of a certain severity occurs,
the windows are automatically closed ex-
cept a gap.
Safety information
Warning
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of
the windows is clear during opening and
closing.
Overview
Power windows
Opening
– Press the switch to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch is
being held.
– Press the switch beyond the resist-
ance point.
The window opens automatically. Press-
ing the switch again stops the motion.
Convenient opening with the vehicle key,
refer to page 67.
Closing
– Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
The window closes while the switch is
being held.
– Pull the switch beyond the resist-
ance point.
The window closes automatically if the
door is closed. Pulling the switch again
stops the motion.
Convenient closing with the vehicle key, re-
fer to page 68.
Closing via Comfort Access, refer to
page 73.
Jam protection system
Concept
The jam protection prevents objects or body
parts becoming jammed between the door
frame and window while a window is being
closed.
General information
If resistance or a blockage is detected while
a window is being closed, the closing action
is interrupted.
Seite 81
Opening and closing CONTROLS
81
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
The window opens slightly.
Safety information
Warning
Accessories on the windows such as an-
tennas can impact jam protection. There is
a risk of injury. Do not install accessories
in the area of movement of the windows.
Closing without the jam protection
system
In case of danger from the outside or if ice
might prevent normal closing, proceed as
follows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance
point and hold it there.
The window closes with limited jam pro-
tection. If the closing force exceeds a
specific threshold, closing is inter-
rupted.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance
point again within approx. 4 seconds
and hold it there.
The window closes without jam protec-
tion.
Malfunction
General information
In certain situations a window can only be
operated to a limited extent.
– After a power failure during the opening
or closing process, the a window can
only be operated to a limited extent. The
system must be initialized in this case.
– The power window motors are equipped
with overheating protection. If a win-
dow is opened and closed several times
within a short period of time, the over-
heating protection switches the motor
off temporarily. Depending on the de-
gree of overheating, it may only be pos-
sible to close the window or it may not
be possible to operate it at all.
In this case: allow the power window
motor to cool down.
Initializing the system
The system can be initialized when the ve-
hicle is stationary and the drive-ready state
is switched on.
During initialization, the affected window
closes without jam protection.
Warning
When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of
the windows is clear during opening and
closing.
1. Open the affected window completely.
2. Pull the switch to the resistance
point and hold.
The window closes.
3. Continue holding the switch pulled
to the resistance point.
The window opens and closes once or
twice after approx. 15 seconds, depend-
ing on the vehicle's equipment.
4. Release switch.
Panoramic glass sunroof
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the glass
sunroof is automatically closed.
Seite 82
CONTROLS Opening and closing
82
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Safety information
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of
the glass sunroof is clear during opening
and closing.
Overview
Tilting the glass sunroof
Press back the switch up to or
beyond the resistance point
and release it.
The glass sunroof is raised.
Opening glass sunroof
When the glass sunroof is closed
Press the switch back beyond
the resistance point and re-
lease it twice.
The glass sunroof is opened.
Pressing the switch again
stops the motion.
With the glass sunroof completely
raised
– Slide switch back to the re-
sistance point and hold.
The glass sunroof is
opened as long as the
switch is pressed.
– Press the switch back beyond the resist-
ance point and release it.
The glass sunroof is opened.
Pressing the switch again stops the mo-
tion.
Comfort position
In some models, the wind noises in the car's
interior are lowest when the glass sunroof
is not fully open. In these models, the auto-
matic function initially only opens the glass
sunroof up to this comfort position.
Pressing the switch again opens the glass
sunroof fully.
Closing glass sunroof
With the glass sunroof open
– Slide switch forward to the
resistance point and hold.
The glass sunroof is closed
as long as the switch is
pressed and stops in the
raised position.
– Press the switch forward beyond the re-
sistance point and release it.
The glass sunroof is closed and stops in
the raised position.
Pressing the switch again stops the mo-
tion.
– Press the switch forward beyond the re-
sistance point and release it twice.
The glass sunroof is closed.
Seite 83
Opening and closing CONTROLS
83
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Pressing the switch again stops the mo-
tion.
With the glass sunroof completely
raised
Press the switch forward be-
yond the resistance point and
release it.
The glass sunroof is closed.
Jam protection system
Concept
The jam protection prevents objects or body
parts from becoming jammed between the
roof and glass sunroof while the glass sun-
roof is closing.
General information
If resistance or a blockage is detected while
the glass sunroof is being closed, the clos-
ing action is interrupted.
The glass sunroof opens slightly.
Closing without the jam protection
system
If there is an external danger, proceed as
follows:
1. Push the switch forward past the resist-
ance point and hold it.
The glass sunroof closes with limited
jam protection. If the closing force ex-
ceeds a specific threshold, closing is in-
terrupted.
2. Push the switch forward again past the
resistance point and hold until the glass
sunroof closes without jam protection.
Make sure that the closing area is clear.
Initializing after a power
interruption
After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the glass sunroof can only
be operated to a limited extent. The system
must be initialized in this case. MINI rec-
ommends having this work performed only
by a dealer's service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
Seite 84
CONTROLS Opening and closing
84
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and
functions that are not necessarily available
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Sitting safely
An ideal seating position that meets the
needs of the occupants can make a vital
contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
In the event of an accident, the correct seat-
ing position plays an important role. Follow
the information in the following chapters:
– Seats, refer to page 85.
– Safety belts, refer to page 87.
– Head restraints, refer to page 89.
– Airbags, refer to page 141.
Front seats
Safety information
Warning
Seat adjustments while driving can lead to
unexpected movements of the seat. Vehi-
cle control could be lost. There is a risk of
accident. Only adjust the seat on the driv-
er's side when the vehicle is stationary.
Warning
With a backrest inclined too far to the
rear, the efficacy of the safety belt can no
longer be ensured. There is a risk of slid-
ing under the safety belt in an accident.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip.
Adjust the backrest so that it is in the
most upright position as possible and do
not adjust again while driving.
Warning
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
area of movement of the seat is clear prior
to any adjustment.
Adjusting seats
Overview
1 Forward/backward
2 Thigh support
3 Height
4 Backrest tilt
Seite 85
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS
85
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Forward/backward
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the de-
sired direction.
After releasing the lever, move the seat for-
ward or back slightly making sure it en-
gages properly.
Height
Pull the lever up or press it down as often as
needed to reach the desired height.
Backrest tilt
Pull the lever, and apply your weight to the
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be
adjusted in a way that it supports the lum-
bar region of the spine. The lower back and
the spine are supported for upright posture.
Turn the wheel in order to increase or de-
crease the curvature.
Thigh support
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and ad-
just the thigh support.
Entering the rear
Safety information
Warning
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
area of movement of the seat is clear prior
to any adjustment.
Seite 86
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
86
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Warning
Unexpected movements of the rear seat
backrest while driving may occur if the
rear seat backrest is unlocked. Vehicle
control could be lost. There is a risk of in-
jury. Fold back and lock the rear seat back-
rests before driving.
Fold the seat backrest forward
1. Pull lever up to the stop.
2. Fold the seat backrest forward.
3. Push the seat forward.
Original position
The driver's seat features a mechanical
memory function for forward/back and
backrest adjustment.
1. Push the seat back into the original po-
sition.
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.
If the backrest is folded back when the seat
is not yet in the original position, the seat
engages in the current position. In this
case, manually adjust longitudinal direction,
refer to page 86.
Front seat heating
Overview
Seat heating
Switching on
Press the button once for each tem-
perature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the trip is continued within approx.
15 minutes after a stop, seat heating is acti-
vated automatically with the temperature
selected last.
When GREEN Mode is activated, refer to
page 214, the heating output is reduced.
Switching off
Press and hold the button until the
LEDs go out.
Safety belts
Number of safety belts and safety
belt buckles
The vehicle is fitted with four safety belts
to ensure occupant safety. However, they
can only offer protection when adjusted cor-
rectly.
Seite 87
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are be-
ing worn by all occupants before driving off.
Although airbags enhance safety by provid-
ing added protection, they are not a substi-
tute for safety belts.
If needed, disengage the safety belt in the
rear from the belt buckle on the side.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point
will be correct for adult seat occupants of
every build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
Safety information
Warning
Use of a safety belt to buckle more than
one person will potentially defeat the abil-
ity of the safety belt to serve its protective
function. There is a risk of injuries or dan-
ger to life. Do not allow more than one per-
son to wear a single safety belt. Infants
and children are not allowed on an occu-
pant's lap, but must be transported and se-
cured in designated child restraint sys-
tems.
Warning
The efficacy of safety gear, including
safety belts, can be limited or lost when
safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An
incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause
additional injuries, for instance in the
event of an accident, braking or evasive
maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that all occu-
pants are wearing safety belts correctly.
Warning
The efficacy of safety gear, including
safety belts, may not be fully functional or
fail in the following situations:
– The safety belts or safety belt buckles
are damaged, soiled, or changed in
any other way.
– Belt tensioners or belt retractors
were modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged
in the event of an accident. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. Do not modify
safety belts, safety belt buckles, belt ten-
sioners, belt retractors or belt anchors and
keep them clean. Have the safety belts
checked after an accident at the dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Correct use of safety belts
– Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight
to your body over your lap and should-
ers.
– Wear the safety belt deep on your hips
over your lap. The safety belt may not
press on your stomach.
– Do not rub the safety belt against sharp
edges, or guide it or jam it in across
hard or fragile objects.
– Avoid thick clothing.
– Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up-
ward around your upper body.
Buckling the safety belt
1. Guide the safety belt slowly over
shoulder and hip to put it on.
Seite 88
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
88
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety
belt buckle. The safety belt buckle must
engage audibly.
Unbuckling the safety belt
1. Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-
up mechanism.
Safety belt reminder for driver's
seat and front passenger seat
Display in the instrument cluster
The indicator light lights up and a
signal sounds. Make sure that the
safety belts are positioned correctly.
The safety belt reminder can also be acti-
vated if objects are placed on the front pas-
senger seat.
Safety belt reminder for rear seats
General information
The safety belt reminder is automatically
activated each time the drive-ready state is
switched on.
The safety belt reminder is also activated
when a passenger unbuckles a rear seat
safety belt during the trip.
Display in the instrument cluster
The indicator light in the instrument cluster
illuminates after switching on the drive-
ready state.
Symbol Description
Green: the safety belt is buckled
on the corresponding rear seat.
Red: the safety belt is not buck-
led on the corresponding rear
seat.
Front head restraints
Safety information
Warning
A missing protective effect due to re-
moved or not correctly adjusted head re-
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
– Before driving, install the removed
head restraints on the occupied seats.
– Adjust the head restraint so its center
supports the back of the head at as
close to eye level as possible.
– Adjust the distance so that the head
restraint is as close as possible to the
back of the head. Adjust the distance
via the backrest tilt as needed.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is
clear when moving the head restraint.
Seite 89
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS
89
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck
area. There is a risk of injury.
– Do not use seat or head restraint cov-
ers.
– Do not hang objects, for instance
clothes hangers, directly on the head
restraint.
– Only use accessories that have been
determined to be safe for attachment
to a head restraint.
– Do not use any accessories, for in-
stance pillows, while driving.
Adjusting the height
– To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
– To raise: push the head restraint up.
After setting the height, make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one
will be sitting in the seat in question.
1. If necessary, fold the rear seat backrest
forward.
2. Pull head restraint up as far as possible.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
head restraint out completely.
Installing
Proceed in the reverse order to install the
head restraint.
Rear head restraints
Safety information
Warning
A missing protective effect due to re-
moved or not correctly adjusted head re-
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
– Before driving, install the removed
head restraints on the occupied seats.
– Adjust the head restraint so its center
supports the back of the head at as
close to eye level as possible.
– Adjust the distance so that the head
restraint is as close as possible to the
back of the head. Adjust the distance
via the backrest tilt as needed.
Seite 90
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
90
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is
clear when moving the head restraint.
Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck
area. There is a risk of injury.
– Do not use seat or head restraint cov-
ers.
– Do not hang objects, for instance
clothes hangers, directly on the head
restraint.
– Only use accessories that have been
determined to be safe for attachment
to a head restraint.
– Do not use any accessories, for in-
stance pillows, while driving.
Adjusting the height
– To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
– To raise: push the head restraint up.
After setting the height, make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
Fold down
– To fold down: press the button, arrow 1,
and press down the head restraint, ar-
row 2.
– Forward: fold the head restraint toward
the front as far as it will go. Make sure
that the head restraint engages cor-
rectly.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one
will be sitting in the seat in question.
1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer
to page 203, in question.
2. Pull head restraint up against the resist-
ance.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
head restraint out completely.
Installing
Proceed in the reverse order to install the
head restraint.
Seite 91
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS
91
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the front passenger side is
more curved than the driver's side mirror.
Safety information
Warning
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. The distance to the traf-
fic behind could be incorrectly estimated,
for instance while changing lanes. There is
a risk of accident. Estimate the distance to
the traffic behind by looking over your
shoulder.
Overview
1 Adjusting
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon-
itor
3 Folding in and out
Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch.
Adjusting electrically
Press the button.
The mirror movement follows the
button movement.
Malfunction
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust
the mirror by pressing the edges of the mir-
ror glass.
Folding in and out
NOTICE
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehi-
cle can be damaged in vehicle washes.
There is a risk of damage to property. Be-
fore washing, fold in the mirrors by hand
or with the button.
Press the button.
Folding is only possible up to a speed of ap-
prox. 15 mph/20 km/h.
Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in
the following situations:
– In vehicle washes.
– On narrow roads.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out
automatically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically
heated as needed and when the standby
state is switched on.
Automatic dimming feature
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is
automatically dimmed. Photocells in the
car's interior mirror, refer to page 93, are
used to control this.
Seite 92
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
92
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior
mirror
Concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass
on the front passenger side is tilted down-
ward. This improves your view of the curb
and other formatting issue - low-lying ob-
stacles when parking, for instance.
Activating
1. slide the switch to the driver's
side mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger's side mir-
ror position.
Interior mirror, manually dimmable
Flip lever
To reduce the blinding effect of the interior
mirror, flip the lever forward.
Turn knob
Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect
by the interior mirror.
Interior mirror, automatic dimming
feature
Overview
Photocells are used for control:
– In the mirror glass.
– On the back of the mirror.
Functional requirements
– Keep the photocells clean.
– Do not cover the area between the inte-
rior mirror and the windshield.
Seite 93
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel CONTROLS
93
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Steering wheel
Safety information
Warning
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.
There is a risk of accident. Adjustng the
steering wheel while the vehicle is sta-
tionary only.
Adjusting
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer-
red height and angle to suit your seating
position.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Seite 94
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
94
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and
functions that are not necessarily available
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
The right place for children
Safety information
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the ve-
hicle can cause the vehicle to move and
endanger themselves and traffic, for in-
stance due to the following actions:
– Pressing the Start/Stop button.
– Releasing the parking brake.
– Opening and closing the doors or
windows.
– Engaging selector lever position N.
– Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do
not leave children or animals unattended
in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with
you when exiting and lock the vehicle.
Warning
A heated vehicle may result in death to
persons, especially children, or animals.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Do not leave persons, especially children,
or animals unattended in the vehicle.
Warning
Exposure to intense sunlight can cause
child restraint systems and their compo-
nents to become very hot. Persons may
sustain burn injuries when touching the
hot components. There is a risk of injury.
Do not expose the child restraint system to
direct sunlight or cover where necessary.
If necessary, let the child restraint system
cool down before transporting a child. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehi-
cle.
Always transport children in the
rear seat
General information
Accident research shows that the safest
place for children is in the rear seat.
Transport children younger than 13 years of
age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the
rear seat in suitable child restraint systems
designed for the age, weight and size of the
child. Children 13 years of age or older must
wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child
restraint system can no longer be used due
to their age, weight, or size.
Seite 95
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
95
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Safety information
Warning
The safety belt cannot be fastened cor-
rectly on children shorter than 5 ft,
150 cm without suitable additional child
restraint systems. The efficacy of safety
gear, including safety belts, can be limited
or lost when safety belts are fastened in-
correctly. An incorrectly fastened safety
belt can cause additional injuries, for in-
stance in the event of an accident, braking
or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of in-
juries or danger to life. Secure children
shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable
child restraint systems.
Children on the front passenger
seat
General information
Before using a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, ensure that the front,
knee, and side airbags on the front passen-
ger side are deactivated. For automatic de-
activation of front-seat passenger airbags,
refer to page 143.
Safety information
Warning
Active front-seat passenger airbags can in-
jure a child in a child restraint system
when the airbags are activated. There is a
risk of injury. Make sure that the front-
seat passenger airbags are deactivated and
that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica-
tor light lights up.
Warning
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect
seat adjustment or improper installation of
the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that the child re-
straint system fits securely against the
backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest
tilt for all affected backrests and correctly
adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and
backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head
restraints or remove them.
Installing child restraint sys-
tems
General information
Pay attention to the specifications of the
child restraint system manufacturer when
selecting, installing, and using child re-
straint systems.
In order to facilitate the installation of a
back-facing child restraint system in the
rear:
Move the front passenger seat as far up as
possible before folding down the backrest.
Safety information
Warning
The protective effect of child restraint sys-
tems and their fastening systems which
have been damaged or exposed to an acci-
dent can be limited or lost. A child cannot
be properly restrained in the event of an
accident, braking or evasive maneuvers.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Seite 96
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
96
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Do not use child restraint systems which
have been damaged or exposed to an acci-
dent.
If a child restraint system and its fasten-
ing system has been damaged or exposed
to an accident, have these systems
checked and replaced by the dealer's serv-
ice center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Warning
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect
seat adjustment or improper installation of
the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that the child re-
straint system fits securely against the
backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest
tilt for all affected backrests and correctly
adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and
backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head
restraints or remove them.
On the rear seats
In order to facilitate the installation of a
back-facing child restraint system:
Move the front passenger seat as far up as
possible before folding down the backrest.
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
Warning
Active front-seat passenger airbags can in-
jure a child in a child restraint system
when the airbags are activated. There is a
risk of injury. Make sure that the front-
seat passenger airbags are deactivated and
that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica-
tor light lights up.
Before installing a child restraint system in
the front passenger seat, make sure that the
front, knee and side airbags on the front
passenger side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags
automatically, refer to page 143.
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint system,
move the front passenger seat as far back as
possible and adjust its height to the highest
and thus best possible position for the belt
and to offer optimal protection in the event
of an accident.
If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is
located in front of the belt guide of the child
seat, move the front passenger seat care-
fully forward until the best possible belt
guide position is reached.
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passen-
ger safety belt can be permanently locked to
fasten child restraint systems.
Locking the safety belt
1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with
the safety belt.
Seite 97
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
97
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and
pull it tight against the child restraint
system. The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com-
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil-
dren.
Pay attention to the operating and safety in-
formation from the child restraint system
manufacturer when installing and using
LATCH child restraint fixing systems.
Mounts for the lower LATCH
anchors
The lower anchors may be used to attach
the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a com-
bined child and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg
when the child is restrained by the internal
harnesses.
Safety information
Warning
If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys-
tems are not correctly engaged, the protec-
tive effect of the LATCH child restraint
fixing system can be limited. There is a
risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure
that the lower anchors are securely en-
gaged and that the LATCH child restraint
fixing system fits securely against the
backrest.
Position
Symbol Meaning
The corresponding symbol
shows the mounts for the
lower LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower
anchors are marked with a
pair, (2), of LATCH symbols.
Before installing LATCH child
restraint fixing systems
Pull the safety belt away from the area of
the child restraint system.
Assembly of LATCH child restraint
fixing systems
1. Install child restraint system, see manu-
facturer's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are
properly engaged.
Child restraint systems with tether
strap
Safety information
Warning
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly
used for the child restraint system, the
protective effect can be reduced. There is
a risk of injury. Make sure that the upper
retaining strap does not run over sharp
edges and is not twisted as it passes the
upper anchor.
Seite 98
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Warning
If the rear backrest is not locked, the pro-
tective effect of the child restraint system
is limited or there is none. In certain situa-
tions, for instance braking maneuvers or
in case of an accident, the rear backrest
can fold forward. There is a risk of injuries
or danger to life. Make sure that the rear
backrests are locked.
NOTICE
The anchors for the upper retaining straps
of child restraint systems are only pro-
vided for these retaining straps. When
other objects are mounted, the anchors
can be damaged. There is a risk of damage
to property. Only mount child restraint
systems to the upper anchors.
Anchors
The respective symbol shows the an-
chor for the upper retaining strap.
Seats with an upper top tether are
marked with this symbol. It can be found on
the rear seat backrest or the rear window
shelf.
Routing the retaining strap
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Anchor
5 Seat backrest
6 Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the anchor
1. Raise the head restraint, if needed.
2. On the rear seat: Guide the upper retain-
ing strap between or along both sides of
the supports of the head restraint to the
anchor.
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
the anchor on the rear seat.
4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
down.
Seite 99
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
99
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and
functions that are not necessarily available
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Start/Stop button
Concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches standby state on or
off.
Drive-ready state is switched
on when you depress the
brake pedal while pressing the Start/Stop
button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button again
switches drive-ready state back off and
radio-ready state is switched back on.
The drive-ready state cannot be activated as
long as the charging cable is connected, re-
fer to page 218.
Radio-ready state
Some electronic systems/power consumers
are ready for operation.
The radio-ready state is switched off auto-
matically:
– If the driver's or front passenger door is
opened when exiting the vehicle, with
drive-ready state switched off manually.
– After approx. 8 minutes.
– When the vehicle is locked using the
central locking system.
– If the charge state of the batteries is
low.
Radio-ready state remains active if, for in-
stance drive-ready state is automatically
switched off for the following reasons:
– Opening or closing the driver's door.
– Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.
– When automatically switching from low
beams to parking lights.
Radio-ready state is also switched back on
if the on/off button on the radio is pressed
when the vehicle is parked.
If drive-ready state is switched on: the sys-
tem automatically switches to radio-ready
state when the driver's door is opened and
the driver's safety belt is unbuckled if the
lights are switched off or the daytime run-
ning lights are switched on.
Standby state
All electronic systems/power consumers are
ready for operation. Odometer and trip od-
ometer are displayed in the instrument clus-
ter.
To preserve the battery, use standby state
and activated power features only as long as
absolutely necessary.
Turning on standby state
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches
standby state on or off.
Standby state is switched off automatically:
Seite 100
CONTROLS Driving
100
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
– When locking the vehicle, even if the
low beams are switched on.
– When opening or closing the driver
door, if the driver's safety belt is un-
buckled and the low beams are switched
off.
– While the driver's safety belt is unbuck-
led with driver's door open and low
beams off.
– When the batteries' state of charge is
low, if the low beams are switched off.
– The low beams switch to parking lights
after approx. 15 minutes of no use.
– When the front doors are opened if
there is no other person sitting in the
front seats.
Drive-ready state
Activated drive-ready state is the equiva-
lent of a running engine in conventional ve-
hicles. Deactivated drive-ready state is
equivalent to switching the engine off.
If drive-ready state is switched on, the vehi-
cle ready to drive and the pointer in the in-
strument cluster is on READY signal, refer
to page 101.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the
instrument cluster light up for a varied
length of time.
To save battery power when parking, switch
off drive-ready state and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
The drive-ready state is switched off auto-
matically if the driver's safety belt is not
buckled when the driver's door is opened.
Safety information
NOTICE
Selector lever position P is automatically
engaged when drive-ready state is
switched off. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not switch drive-ready state
off in vehicle washes.
Drive-ready state in detail
Safety information
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of
accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-
cle against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-
cured against rolling away, follow the fol-
lowing:
– Set the parking brake.
– On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, turn the front wheels in the di-
rection of the curb.
– On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-
stance with a wheel chock.
Switching on drive-ready state
1. Close the driver's door.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Drive-ready state is switched on.
Seite 101
Driving CONTROLS
101
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Display in the instrument cluster
The READY display indicates
that the vehicle is ready for
driving.
Driving off
Functional requirements
Driving is possible under the following con-
ditions:
– The high-voltage battery is sufficiently
charged.
– The driver's door is closed.
State of charge in strong temperature
fluctuations
In the case of strong temperature fluctua-
tions and a low state of charge of the high-
voltage battery, it may not be possible to
start the vehicle again at the beginning of
the next trip. Recharge vehicle with low
state of charge in time.
Driving
1. Switch on drive-ready state.
2. Apply the brake and engage the selector
lever in position D or R.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Depress the accelerator pedal to drive.
Selector lever positions
The engaged selector lever position is dis-
played on the selector lever.
D Drive
Position for normal vehicle operation.
R is reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
N is Neutral
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without
power, for instance in vehicle washes, refer
to page 103, in selector lever position N.
P Park
Engage only while the vehicle is stationary
and the brake is applied. The drive wheels
are blocked.
Selector lever position P is engaged auto-
matically in the following situations:
– If the driver's safety belt is off, the driv-
er's door is open and neither brake nor
accelerator pedal are depressed while
drive-ready state is switched on and se-
lector lever position D or R is set.
– After switching off drive-ready state via
the Start/Stop button, if selector lever
position D or R is set.
– With standby state switched off.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that
selector lever position P is set. Otherwise,
the vehicle may begin to move. On uphill
Seite 102
CONTROLS Driving
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
grades, also Set parking brake, refer to
page 107.
Engaging selector lever positions
General information
– Interlock: the selector lever position P
can be exited only with drive-ready
state engaged.
– Shift lock: with the vehicle stationary,
press on the brake pedal before shifting
out of P or N; otherwise, the shift com-
mand will not be executed.
– Shift lock: before shifting out of P, re-
move the charging cable from the vehi-
cle; otherwise, the shift command will
not be executed.
Engage D, N, R
A selector lever lock prevents the following
faulty operation:
– Unintentional shifting into selector
lever position R.
– Unintentional shifting from selector
lever position P into another selector
lever position.
1. Press and hold the button to release the
selector lever lock.
2. With the driver's safety belt fastened,
briefly push the selector lever in the de-
sired direction, past a resistance point,
if needed. The selector lever automati-
cally returns to the center position when
released.
Engaging P
Press button P.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
General information
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll
without its own power for a short distance,
for instance in a car wash, or be pushed.
Engaging selector lever position N
1. Switch on drive-ready state while press-
ing on the brake pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Engage selector lever position N.
5. Switch off drive-ready state.
In this way, standby state remains
switched on, and a Check Control mes-
sage is displayed.
Seite 103
Driving CONTROLS
103
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
The vehicle can roll.
NOTICE
Selector lever position P is automatically
engaged when standby state is switched
off. There is a risk of damage to property.
Do not switch standby state off in vehicle
washes.
Irrespective of standby state, the selector
lever position P is automatically engaged af-
ter approx. 15 minutes.
If there is a malfunction, you may not be
able to change the selector lever position.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock,
if needed.
Electronic unlocking of the
transmission lock
General information
Electronically unlock the transmission lock
to maneuver vehicle from a danger area.
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set
the parking brake to prevent the vehicle
from rolling away.
Engaging selector lever position N
1. Hold the Start/Stop button pressed.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Press and hold the selector lever in posi-
tion N.
A corresponding Check Control message
is displayed.
4. Press the selector lever again into posi-
tion N within approx. 2 seconds.
Position N is indicated on the selector
lever.
5. Release Start/Stop button and brake.
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger
area and secure it against moving on its
own.
Switching off drive-ready state
Park the vehicle. Noises from the electrical
system such as for cooling the high-voltage
system might still be audible.
After stopping the vehicle:
1. Apply brake and engage the selector
lever in position P.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The READY indicator goes out and a
signal sounds.
In case of longer idle times, follow the
instructions in the Care chapter, refer to
page 266.
Driving in detail: eDRIVE
Safety information
DANGER
The braking power of the electric motor
can be stronger than for a vehicle with
combustion engine. Abrupt braking and
slow-down may confuse other traffic.
There is a risk of accident. Carefully re-
lease the accelerator pedal. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where ap-
propriate.
Seite 104
CONTROLS Driving
104
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Warning
When driving in electric mode, pedes-
trians and other traffic might pay less at-
tention to the vehicle due to the lack of
engine noise. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.
Watch traffic closely and actively inter-
vene where appropriate.
Warning
Without energy recovery, there is no brak-
ing power of the electric motor available.
The vehicle could roll further than antici-
pated. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Accelerator pedal positions
1 Deceleration
2 Coasting
3 Acceleration or constant speed: ePO-
WER
Deceleration
Releasing the accelerator pedal causes de-
celeration similar to cautious braking. Addi-
tionally, the brake lights will come on with-
out hitting the brakes.
The degree of the deceleration depends on
the energy recovery, refer to page 106, set-
ting.
During the deceleration, energy is recov-
ered and the high-voltage battery is
charged.
Energy recovery: CHARGE
The high-voltage battery is recharged in
part through energy recovery. The electric
motor acts as a generator when decelerating
and converts the kinetic energy into electri-
cal energy.
Energy can be recovered if the following
conditions are met:
– The vehicle is moving.
– Speed higher than approx.
12 mph/20 km/h.
– Selector lever position D or R is set.
– Accelerator pedal is not actuated or only
pressed down one third of the way.
Energy cannot be recovered in the following
situations:
– Selector lever position N is engaged.
– While drive stability control systems,
for instance DTC, are active and control-
ling the vehicle, even though this is not
indicated by an indicator light.
– The high-voltage battery is fully
charged.
– When temperature of the high-voltage
battery is very low or very high.
In winter it might be possible that the
energy recovery is temporarily unavaila-
ble after startup.
Exemplary traffic situations
If a deceleration operation is foreseeable
while driving, this can be used for energy
recovery.
The following exemplary driving situations
may be suitable:
Seite 105
Driving CONTROLS
105
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
– Decelerating downhill.
– Deceleration before a red light.
Avoid late or abrupt braking. Instead, decel-
erate the vehicle using energy recovery.
Set energy recovery
Concept
The energy recovery is adjustable.
– High energy recovery: the vehicle decel-
erates faster, more energy is returned to
the high-voltage battery.
– Low energy recovery: the vehicle decel-
erates more slowly, less energy is re-
turned to the high-voltage battery.
Overview
Energy recovery
Adjusting
Press the button up or down.
– LED off: high energy recovery.
– LED illuminated: low energy recovery.
The setting is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Coasting
The electric drive makes it possible to roll
without consuming energy. This driving
condition is referred to as coasting.
Proactive driving reduces energy consump-
tion and increases the range.
With vehicle rolling, no energy is recov-
ered.
Exemplary traffic situations
If a route can be traveled without antici-
pated need for braking, it is advantageous
to roll.
The following exemplary driving situations
may be suitable:
– Rolling on a straight downhill route
without obstacles.
– Coasting on a route without obstacles.
Avoid late or abrupt braking.
Acoustic pedestrian protection
The system generates a continuous driving
noise during electric driving up to approx.
20 mph/30 km/h.
A speaker system broadcasts the noise to
the surroundings.
As a result, other road users, for instance
pedestrians or cyclists, can better perceive
the vehicle.
Heavily discharged high-voltage
battery
If the high-voltage battery is heavily dis-
charged during the trip, the performance
and some comfort features are reduced
step-by-step to extend the range.
Heated high-voltage battery
With a stationary vehicle
In isolated cases, when the vehicle is sta-
tionary, it is possible for the high-voltage
battery to overheat, for instance, as a result
of extreme hot or cold temperatures or di-
rect sunlight. Drive-ready state cannot be
Seite 106
CONTROLS Driving
106
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
switched on if the high-voltage battery is
overheated.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Another message will indicate when drive-
ready state is available again.
While driving
If the high-voltage battery overheats during
the trip, the performance is reduced step-
by-step in order to cool down the battery.
The ePOWER performance display in the in-
strument cluster decreases. If the tempera-
ture increases further, park the vehicle until
the high-voltage battery has cooled down. If
the performance display falls to 0, the drive-
ready state is switched off and the vehicle
comes to a stop.
Parking brake
Concept
The parking brake is used to prevent the ve-
hicle from rolling when it is parked.
Safety information
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of
accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-
cle against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-
cured against rolling away, follow the fol-
lowing:
– Set the parking brake.
– On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, turn the front wheels in the di-
rection of the curb.
– On uphill grades or on a downhill
slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-
stance with a wheel chock.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the ve-
hicle can cause the vehicle to move and
endanger themselves and traffic, for in-
stance due to the following actions:
– Pressing the Start/Stop button.
– Releasing the parking brake.
– Opening and closing the doors or
windows.
– Engaging selector lever position N.
– Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do
not leave children or animals unattended
in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with
you when exiting and lock the vehicle.
Overview
Parking brake
Setting
With a stationary vehicle
Pull the switch.
The LED lights up.
The indicator light lights up red. The
parking brake is set.
Depending on the stopping situation, the
parking brake is engaged automatically.
Seite 107
Driving CONTROLS
107
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
In some parking situations, the parking
brake is automatically engaged, when selec-
tor lever position P is engaged. In these
cases, the parking brake is released auto-
matically when you leave the selector lever
position P.
While driving
To use as emergency brake while driving:
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle
brakes hard while the switch is being
pulled.
The indicator light lights up red, a
signal sounds and the brake lights
light up.
A Check Control message is displayed.
If the vehicle is decelerated to a complete
stop, the parking brake is engaged.
Releasing
Releasing manually
1. Switch on standby state.
2. Press the switch while stepping on
the brake pedal or selector lever posi-
tion P is set.
The LED and indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
Automatic release
For automatic release, step on the accelera-
tor pedal.
The LED and indicator light go out.
The parking brake is automatically released
when you step on the accelerator pedal un-
der the following conditions:
– Standby state switched on.
– Drive mode engaged.
– Driver buckled in and doors closed.
Malfunction
If the parking brake fails or malfunctions,
secure the vehicle against rolling before ex-
iting.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for
instance with a wheel chock, after exiting
the vehicle.
After a power failure
Re-activating the parking brake
1. Switch on standby state.
2. Press the switch while stepping on
the brake pedal or selector lever posi-
tion P is set.
It may take several seconds for the brake to
be reactivated. Some mechanical sounds as-
sociated with this process are normal.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster goes out as soon as the park-
ing brake is ready for operation.
Hold function
Concept
The system holds the vehicle automatically
when gear is engaged. This prevents rolling
against the direction of travel.
In selector lever position D, the vehicle can-
not roll backwards. In selector lever posi-
tion R, it cannot roll forward. The brake
pedal does not have to be pressed.
Reducing energy consumption
To reduce energy consumption when the
hold function is activated, activate the park-
ing brake or engage the selector lever in po-
sition P when the vehicle is stopped for
long periods of time.
Seite 108
CONTROLS Driving
108
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
The hold function can be affected by the ve-
hicle's load and the road incline. If needed, a
Check Control message will appear and po-
sition P will be selected automatically.
Turn signal, high beams, head-
light flasher
Turn signal
Using turn signals
Press the lever past the resistance point.
Canada: the lever returns into its starting
position after actuation. To switch off man-
ually, slightly tap the lever to the resistance
point.
Triple turn signal activation
Lightly tap the lever up or down.
The triple turn signal duration can be ad-
justed.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "One-touch turn signal"
6. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and
hold it there for as long as you want the
turn signal to flash.
Malfunction
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
light indicates that a turn signal bulb has
failed.
High beams, headlight flasher
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
– High beams on, arrow 1.
The high beams light up when the low
beams are switched on.
– High beams off/headlight flasher, ar-
row 2.
Wiper system
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is
dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or
cause them to become worn more quickly.
Seite 109
Driving CONTROLS
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Safety information
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or
damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the vehicle is
switched off when the wipers are in the
folded away state and the wipers are
folded in when switching on.
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching
on. There is a risk of damage to property.
Defrost the windshield prior to switching
the wipers on.
Switching on
Press the lever up until the desired position
is reached.
– Resting position of the wipers, posi-
tion 0.
– Intermittent operation or rain sensor,
position 1.
– Normal wiper speed, position 2.
– Fast wiper speed, position 3.
When travel is interrupted with the wiper
system switched on: when travel continues,
the wipers resume at their previous speed.
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the lever down.
– Switching off: press the lever down until
it reaches its standard position.
– Brief wipe: press the lever down from
the standard position.
The lever automatically returns to its in-
itial position when released.
Interval mode or rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the
time between wipes depending on the in-
tensity of the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, di-
rectly in front of the interior mirror. With-
out the rain sensor, the frequency of the
wiper operation is preset.
Seite 110
CONTROLS Driving
110
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Safety information
NOTICE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in vehicle
washes. There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle
washes.
Activating
Press the lever up once from its standard
position, arrow 1.
Wiping is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
In frosty conditions, wiper operation may
not start.
Deactivating
Press the lever back into the standard posi-
tion.
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of
the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel.
With deactivated rain sensor: set the inter-
val.
With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen-
sor sensitivity.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the
rain sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the
rain sensor.
Windshield washer system
Safety information
Warning
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win-
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is a risk of accident. Only use
the washer systems, if the washer fluid
cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti-
freeze, if needed.
NOTICE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not use the washer system when the
washer fluid reservoir is empty.
Seite 111
Driving CONTROLS
111
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the
windshield and activates the wipers briefly.
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are auto-
matically heated while standby state is
switched on.
Rear window wiper
Overview
Switching on
Turn the outer switch upward.
– Resting position of the wiper, posi-
tion 0.
– Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re-
verse gear is engaged, the system
switches to continuous operation.
Clean the rear window
Turn the outer switch in the desired direc-
tion.
– In resting position: turn the switch
downward, arrow 3. The switch auto-
matically returns to its idle position
when released.
– In intermittent mode: turn the switch
further, arrow 2. The switch automati-
cally returns to its interval position
when released.
The function is deactivated if the washer
fluid reservoir level is low.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept
The fold-away position enables the wipers
to be folded away from the windshield.
General information
Helpful when changing the wiper blades or
under frosty conditions, for instance.
Safety information
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or
damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the vehicle is
switched off when the wipers are in the
folded away state and the wipers are
folded in when switching on.
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching
on. There is a risk of damage to property.
Seite 112
CONTROLS Driving
112
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Defrost the windshield prior to switching
the wipers on.
Folding away the wipers
1. Switch standby state on and off again.
2. Press and hold the wiper lever down, un-
til the wipers stop in a close to vertical
position.
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from
the windshield.
Folding down the wipers
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
1. Fold the wipers back down onto the
windshield.
2. Switch on standby state.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return
to their resting position and are ready
again for operation.
Canada: wiper system
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is
dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or
cause them to become worn more quickly.
Safety information
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or
damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the vehicle is
switched off when the wipers are in the
folded away state and the wipers are
folded in when switching on.
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching
on. There is a risk of damage to property.
Defrost the windshield prior to switching
the wipers on.
Switching on
Tap up the lever or press it past the resist-
ance point.
– Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
Seite 113
Driving CONTROLS
113
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
– Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap
once beyond the resistance point.
The lever automatically returns to its initial
position when released.
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the lever down.
– To switch off from fast wiper speed:
press down twice.
– To switch off from normal wiper speed:
press down once.
– Brief wipe: press down once.
The lever automatically returns to its initial
position when released.
Interval mode or rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the
time between wipes depending on the in-
tensity of the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, di-
rectly in front of the interior mirror. With-
out the rain sensor, the frequency of the
wiper operation is preset.
Safety information
NOTICE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in vehicle
washes. There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle
washes.
Activating/deactivating
Press the button on the wiper lever.
Wiping is started.
If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor:
the LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
In frosty conditions, wiper operation may
not start.
If a journey is interrupted with the rain sen-
sor switched on: if the trip is resumed
within approx. 15 minutes, the rain sensor
is automatically activated again.
Seite 114
CONTROLS Driving
114
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of
the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel.
With deactivated rain sensor: set the inter-
val.
With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen-
sor sensitivity.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the
rain sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the
rain sensor.
Windshield washer system
Safety information
Warning
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win-
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is a risk of accident. Only use
the washer systems, if the washer fluid
cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti-
freeze, if needed.
NOTICE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not use the washer system when the
washer fluid reservoir is empty.
Cleaning the windshield
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the
windshield and activates the wipers briefly.
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are auto-
matically heated while standby state is
switched on.
Rear window wiper
Overview
Switching on
Turn the outer switch upward.
– Resting position of the wiper, posi-
tion 0.
– Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re-
verse gear is engaged, the system
switches to continuous operation.
Seite 115
Driving CONTROLS
115
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Clean the rear window
Turn the outer switch in the desired direc-
tion.
– In resting position: turn the switch
downward, arrow 3. The switch auto-
matically returns to its idle position
when released.
– In intermittent mode: turn the switch
further, arrow 2. The switch automati-
cally returns to its interval position
when released.
The function is deactivated if the washer
fluid reservoir level is low.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept
The fold-away position enables the wipers
to be folded away from the windshield.
General information
Helpful when changing the wiper blades or
under frosty conditions, for instance.
Safety information
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or
damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the vehicle is
switched off when the wipers are in the
folded away state and the wipers are
folded in when switching on.
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching
on. There is a risk of damage to property.
Defrost the windshield prior to switching
the wipers on.
Folding away the wipers
1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Press the wiper lever up past the point
of resistance and hold it for approx.
3 seconds, until the wipers remain in a
nearly vertical position.
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from
the windshield.
Folding down the wipers
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
1. Fold the wipers back down onto the
windshield.
2. Switch on standby state.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return
to their resting position and are ready
again for operation.
Seite 116
CONTROLS Driving
116
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Washer fluid
General information
All washer nozzles are supplied from one
reservoir.
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield
washer concentrate containing antifreeze
can be used.
Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Safety information
Warning
Some antifreeze agents can contain harm-
ful substances and are flammable. There is
a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Follow
the instructions on the containers. Keep
antifreeze away from ignition sources. Do
not refill operating materials into different
bottles. Store operating materials out of
reach of children.
United States: the washer fluid mixture ra-
tio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many
individual states; do not exceed the allow-
able washer fluid dilution ratio limits that
apply. Follow the usage instructions on the
washer fluid container.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Con-
centrate or the equivalent is recom-
mended.
NOTICE
Silicon-containing additives in the washer
fluid for the water-repelling effect on the
windows can lead to damage to the wash-
ing system. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not add silicon-containing ad-
ditives to the washer fluid.
NOTICE
Mixing different windshield washer con-
centrates or antifreeze can damage the
washing system. There is a risk of damage
to property. Do not mix different wind-
shield washer concentrates or antifreeze.
Follow the information and mixing ratios
provided on the containers.
Overview
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment.
Malfunction
The use of undiluted windshield washer
concentrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can
lead to incorrect readings at temperatures
below +5 ℉/-15 ℃.
Seite 117
Driving CONTROLS
117
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Displays
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and
functions that are not necessarily available
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Instrument cluster
Overview
1 Performance display 120
2 Display/reset miles 124
3 Electronic displays 119
Charging screen 119
4 Vehicle speed
5 Indicator/warning lights
6 High-voltage battery charge indica-
tor 120
Seite 118
CONTROLS Displays
118
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Electronic displays
1 Selector lever position 101
2 Time 125
MINI Driving Modes switch sta-
tus 164
3 Driver assistance systems
4 External temperature 125
Range 125
5 Messages, for instance Check Control
Selection lists 128
Navigation instructions
6 Total miles/trip odometer 124
Onboard Computer 129
Charging screen
Overview
1 Stationary climate control 225
2 Charging status 225
Current range
3 Maximum range
4 End of charging time 225
Departure time with timer 225
5 Departure time with timer 225
Seite 119
Displays CONTROLS
119
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Displays of the eDRIVE sys-
tem
Displays in the instrument cluster
Concept
The display depends on the system's operat-
ing condition. The following functions of
the eDRIVE system are shown in the instru-
ment cluster
– High-voltage battery charge indicator.
– Performance display.
– Drive-ready state: READY.
High-voltage battery charge indicator
Display
The fill level bars indicate the
available charge state of the
high-voltage battery when
standby state and drive-ready
state are switched on.
Safety information
Warning
Even when it is indicated that the high-
voltage battery is discharged, the high-
voltage system is always still under high
voltage. There is a risk of fire or a risk of
injury. Do not touch or change live parts,
for instance orange high-voltage cables,
even when the batteries are discharged.
Performance display
Concept
A pointer indicates the power output in a
scale.
The efficient range for electric driving ePO-
WER and energy recovery CHARGE is
shown in yellow.
General information
Depending on the available power, the effi-
cient range for electric driving ePOWER is
adjusted automatically.
The efficient range for energy recovery de-
pends on the settings via the button for the
energy recovery. Set energy recovery, refer
to page 106.
The available power may be reduced due to
the following factors:
– Heavily discharged high-voltage battery.
– Extreme external temperatures.
– When driving on steep inclines, with a
sporty driving style or in other high-
power driving conditions.
Optimizing the driving style, refer to
page 213.
Display
Pointer in the CHARGE range, arrow 1: dis-
play for energy recovery by coasting or
when decelerating:
– Both LEDs are illuminated yellow: high
energy recovery.
– One LED is illuminated yellow: low en-
ergy recovery.
Pointer in the ePOWER range, arrow 2: effi-
cient acceleration.
Seite 120
CONTROLS Displays
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Drive-ready state: READY
The READY display indicates
that the vehicle is ready for
driving. Drive-ready state in
detail, refer to page 101.
Indications on the Control Display
Energy flow of the eDRIVE system
General information
The display shows the eDRIVE system
while driving or charging the vehicle:
– Yellow: electrical energy.
– Arrow: direction of the energy flow.
– The operating states, such as eDRIVE,
are displayed.
Displaying the energy flow
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "eDRIVE"
Auxiliary users
General information
The following information is displayed:
– If necessary, information about settings
for energy recovery.
– Range potential when switching off in-
dividual auxiliary users.
– Current range.
With split screen: show auxiliary user
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "eDRIVE"
Without split screen: show auxiliary user
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Comfort information"
Check Control
Concept
The Check Control system monitors func-
tions in the vehicle and notifies you of mal-
functions in the monitored systems.
General information
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lights
and text messages in the instrument cluster
and in the Head-up Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal may be out-
put and a SMS text message may appear on
the Control Display.
Indicator/warning lights
General information
The indicator/warning lights can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when
drive-ready state is established.
Red lights
Safety belt reminder
Indicator light flashes or is illumi-
nated: safety belt on the driver or
passenger side is not buckled. The
safety belt reminder can also be activated if
objects are placed on the front passenger
seat.
Seite 121
Displays CONTROLS
121
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Make sure that the safety belts are posi-
tioned correctly.
Airbag system
Airbag system and belt tensioner
may not be working.
Have the vehicle checked immedi-
ately by a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Parking brake
The parking brake is set.
For releasing the parking brake, re-
fer to page 108.
Approach control warning
Indicator light illuminates: advance
warning is issued, for example when
there is the impending danger of a
collision or the distance to the vehicle
ahead is too small.
Increase the distance.
Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the
imminent danger of a collision when the ve-
hicle approaches another vehicle at a rela-
tively high differential speed.
Intervene by braking or make an evasive
maneuver.
Person warning
If a collision with a detected person
is imminent, the symbol lights up
and a signal sounds.
Yellow lights
Antilock Braking System ABS
The Brake Assistant function may
not activate. Avoid abrupt braking.
Take the longer braking distance
into account.
Have the system immediately checked by a
dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
The indicator light flashes: DSC con-
trols the drive and braking forces.
The vehicle is stabilized. Reduce
speed and modify your driving style to the
driving circumstances.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has mal-
functioned.
Have the system checked by a dealer's serv-
ice center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
DSC, refer to page 162.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction
Control is activated
DSC is deactivated or DTC is acti-
vated.
DSC, refer to page 162, and DTC, re-
fer to page 163.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The FTM signals a loss of tire infla-
tion pressure in a tire.
Reduce your speed and stop cau-
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 150.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The indicator light illuminates: the
Tire Pressure Monitor reports a low
tire inflation pressure or a flat tire.
Seite 122
CONTROLS Displays
122
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Follow the information in the Check Control
message.
The indicator light flashes and is then illu-
minated continuously: flat tires or tire pres-
sure losses cannot be detected.
– Interference caused by systems or devi-
ces with the same radio frequency: after
leaving the area of the interference, the
system automatically becomes active
again.
– TPM was unable to complete the reset.
Reset the system again.
– A wheel without TPM wheel electronics
is mounted: have it checked by a deal-
er’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop as needed.
– Malfunction: have the system checked
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 145.
Steering system
Steering system may not be working.
Have the system checked by a deal-
er's service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
Acoustic pedestrian protection inactive
Acoustic pedestrian protection de-
fective.
Have the system checked by a deal-
er's service center or another qualified serv-
ice center or repair shop.
Green lights
Turn signal
Turn signal switched on.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indi-
cator light indicates that a turn sig-
nal bulb has failed.
Turn signal, refer to page 109.
Parking lights, headlight
Parking lights or headlights are
switched on.
Parking lights/low beams, headlight
control, refer to page 135.
Front fog lights
Front fog lights are switched on.
Front fog lights, refer to page 138.
High-beam Assistant
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are switched on and off
automatically depending on the traf-
fic situation.
High-beam Assistant, refer to page 137.
Cruise control
The system is switched on. It main-
tains the speed that was set using
the control elements on the steering
wheel.
Blue lights
High beams
High beams are switched on.
High beams, refer to page 109.
Seite 123
Displays CONTROLS
123
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
Continuous display
Some Check Control messages are displayed
continuously and are not cleared until the
malfunction is eliminated. If several mal-
functions occur at once, the messages are
displayed consecutively.
The messages can be hidden for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis-
played again automatically.
Temporary display
Some Check Control messages are hidden
automatically after approx. 20 seconds. The
Check Control messages are stored and can
be displayed again later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the SMS text message.
Display
Check Control
At least one Check Control message
is displayed or stored.
SMS text messages
SMS text messages in combination with a
symbol in the instrument cluster explain a
Check Control message and the meaning of
the indicator/warning lights.
Supplementary SMS text messages
Additional information, such as on the
cause of an error or the required action, can
be called up via Check Control.
With urgent messages the added text will
be automatically displayed on the Control
Display.
Depending on the Check Control message,
further help can be selected.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the desired text message.
5. Select the desired setting.
Messages after trip completion
Certain messages displayed while driving
are displayed again after standby state is
switched off.
Odometer and trip odometer
Concept
The total mileage driven and the mileage
driven since the last reset are displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Seite 124
CONTROLS Displays
124
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Reset trip distance
Press the button.
– The odometer is displayed
when the standby state is
switched off.
– When standby state is
switched on, the trip od-
ometer is reset.
External temperature
General information
If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a sig-
nal sounds.
A Check Control message is displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Safety information
Warning
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a risk of icy roads, for in-
stance on bridges or shady sections of the
road. There is a risk of accident. Modify
your driving style to the weather condi-
tions at low temperatures.
Display
The external temperature is
displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Time
The time is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Set the time on the Central In-
formation Display (CID), refer
to page 48.
Date
The date is displayed in the in-
strument cluster.
Set the date on the Central In-
formation Display (CID), refer
to page 49.
Range
General information
Always make sure that the range is suffi-
cient for the planned trip. The range is dy-
namic and can abruptly change.
The range can be abruptly reduced or in-
creased based on the following factors:
– Driving style.
– Traffic conditions.
– Program changes via the MINI Driving
Modes switch.
– Climate and terrain conditions.
– Automatic climate control settings.
– After identification of a route through
the navigation system depending on the
route profile, route distance and se-
lected speed.
– When exiting a route or recalculating a
route.
Further information about the topic In-
creasing the range, refer to page 212.
Seite 125
Displays CONTROLS
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Check Control messages indicate a limited
range.
Display
The expected range for the en-
ergy stored in the high-volt-
age battery is continuously
displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Heavily discharged high-voltage
battery
The high-voltage battery is
heavily discharged. Its power
output will be reduced. Heat-
ing and climate control func-
tions will be deactivated. In
this state, the exact range can
no longer be calculated. A short range may
still be available depending on the environ-
mental conditions.
State of charge in strong
temperature fluctuations
In the case of strong temperature fluctua-
tions and a low state of charge of the high-
voltage battery, it may not be possible to
start the vehicle again at the beginning of
the next trip. Recharge vehicle with low
state of charge in time.
Service notifications
Concept
The function displays the service notifica-
tions and the corresponding maintenance
scopes.
General information
The driving distance or the time to the next
scheduled maintenance is displayed briefly
in the instrument cluster after standby state
is switched on.
A service advisor can read out the current
service notifications from your vehicle key.
Display
Detailed information on service
notifications
More information on the type of service re-
quired may be displayed on the Control Dis-
play.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Maintenance and service measures and
legally mandated inspections are dis-
played.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed infor-
mation.
Symbols
Symbols Description
No service is currently re-
quired.
The deadline for scheduled
maintenance or a legally
mandated inspection is ap-
proaching.
The service deadline has al-
ready passed.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle
inspections.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
Seite 126
CONTROLS Displays
126
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Select the desired setting.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the service status or legally
mandated vehicle inspections is automati-
cally transmitted to your dealer’s service
center before your vehicle is due for serv-
ice.
You can check when your dealer’s service
center was notified.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Move the Controller to the left.
4. "Teleservice Call"
Speed Limit Info
Speed Limit Info
Concept
Speed Limit Info shows the current maxi-
mum permitted speed in the instrument
cluster.
General information
The camera at the base of the interior mir-
ror detects traffic signs at the edge of the
road as well as overhead sign posts. Traffic
signs with extra symbols for wet road con-
ditions, etc., are also detected and compared
with the vehicle's onboard data, such as
from the rain sensor, and will be displayed
depending on the situation.
With the navigation system, the system
takes into account the information stored in
the navigation data and also displays speed
limits present on routes without signs.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing visibility and traffic situation.
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where ap-
propriate.
Overview
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior
mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior
mirror clean and clear.
Display
Speed Limit Info is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
Seite 127
Displays CONTROLS
127
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Speed Limit Info
The last speed limit detected.
With navigation system:
Speed Limit Info is not availa-
ble.
Speed Limit Info can also be displayed in
the Head-up Display.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the
following situations:
– In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
fall.
– When traffic signs are fully or partially
concealed by objects, stickers or paint.
– When driving very close to the vehicle
in front of you.
– When driving toward bright lights or
strong reflections.
– When the windshield in front of the in-
terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov-
ered by a sticker, etc.
– In the event of incorrect detection by
the camera.
– If the speed limits stored in the naviga-
tion system are incorrect.
– In areas not covered by the navigation
system.
– When roads differ from the navigation,
such as due to changes in road routing.
– When passing buses or trucks with a
speed sticker.
– If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
– When traffic signs that are valid for a
parallel road are detected.
– During calibration of the camera imme-
diately after vehicle delivery.
Selection lists
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
buttons on the steering wheel and the dis-
play in the instrument cluster can be used
to display or use the following:
– Current audio source.
– Phone redial.
– Turn on voice activation system.
Activating a list and adjusting the
setting
Button on the
steering wheel
Function
Move selection up.
Move selection
down.
Confirm the selec-
tion.
Display
Seite 128
CONTROLS Displays
128
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Onboard Computer
Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different
vehicle data in the instrument cluster, such
as average values.
Calling up information
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
Information is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Information at a glance
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn
signal lever calls up the following informa-
tion:
– Average consumption.
– Average speed.
– Charge state of the high-voltage battery.
– Date.
– Distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated
in the navigation system.
– Time of arrival.
When destination guidance is activated
in the navigation system.
– Trip odometer.
The unit of some information can be
changed.
Setting units, refer to page 49.
Selecting information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you
can select what information from the On-
board Computer can be accessed in the in-
strument cluster.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Information in detail
Display of charge state of the high-
voltage battery as a percentage
The current charge state of
the high-voltage battery can
be displayed as a %-value.
Average consumption
The average consumption is calculated on
the basis of various distances. Periods when
the vehicle is parked with driveready state
switched off are not considered.
Average speed
Periods when the vehicle is parked with
drive-ready state switched off are not in-
cluded when calculating average speed.
Seite 129
Displays CONTROLS
129
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Resetting average values
Press and hold the button on the turn signal
lever.
Distance to destination
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
distance remaining to the destination is dis-
played if a destination is entered in the nav-
igation system before the trip is started.
The distance to the destination is adopted
automatically.
Time of arrival
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
estimated time of arrival is displayed if a
destination is entered in the navigation sys-
tem before the trip is started.
The time must be correctly set.
Onboard Computer on the Control
Display
Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different
vehicle data on the Control Display, such as
average values.
General information
Two types of Onboard Computers are availa-
ble on the Control Display:
– "Onboard info": average values, such as
the consumption, are displayed. The val-
ues can be reset individually.
– "Trip computer": the values deliver an
overview of a specific route and can be
reset as often as necessary.
Calling up the Onboard Computer or
trip computer
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting the Onboard Computer
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info"
4. "Consumption" or "Speed"
5. "OK"
Resetting the trip computer
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip computer"
4. Move the Controller to the left, if
needed.
– "Reset": all values are reset.
– "Automatic reset": all values are
reset approx. 4 hours after the vehi-
cle has come to a standstill.
5. If necessary, "OK"
Speed warning
Concept
A speed limit can be set that when reached
will cause a warning to be issued.
Seite 130
CONTROLS Displays
130
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
General information
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
exceeds the set speed limit again, after it
has dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.
Adjusting
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Warning at:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired
speed is displayed.
6. Press the Controller.
Activating/deactivating
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Speed warning"
Setting your current speed as the
speed warning
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Select current speed"
LED ring on the central in-
strument cluster
Concept
The LED ring displays light animations to
represent specific functions.
Basic displays
Basic functions, such as the state of charge
of the high-voltage battery, can be set to be
displayed continually if so desired.
Event displays
Functions that are only displayed tempora-
rily, for instance the volume or temperature
settings, can be set as event displays.
Several vehicle assistance functions can
also be displayed on the LED ring. This dis-
play corresponds with the displays of the
function in the respective display.
Switching on/off LED ring
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Center Instrument"
5. "Center Instrument"
Adjusting the LED ring
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Center Instrument"
5. "Basic display" or "Event display"
6. Select the desired setting.
Setting the brightness
The brightness can be adjusted when night
lighting is active in the instrument cluster.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
Seite 131
Displays CONTROLS
131
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
3. "Displays"
4. "Center Instrument"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired
brightness is set.
7. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Head-up Display
Concept
This system projects important information
into the driver's field of vision, for instance
the speed.
The driver can get information without
averting his or her eyes from the road.
General information
Follow the instructions for cleaning the
Head-up Display. For additional informa-
tion, see the chapter on care.
Safety information
Warning
When extending and retracting the projec-
tion screen of the Head-up Display, body
parts can be jammed. There is a risk of in-
jury. Make sure that the area of movement
of the projection screen is clear during
opening and closing.
NOTICE
The Head-up Display consists of sensitive
components that can easily be scraped or
damaged. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not place any objects on the
Head-up Display, attach to system compo-
nents or plug into the system. Do not
move the moving parts manually.
Overview
Switching the Head-up Display
on/off
When switching on, the projection lens of
the Head-up Display is extended. When
switching off, the projection lens of the
Head-up Display is retracted again.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Head-Up Display"
Display
Overview
The following information is displayed on
the Head-up Display:
– Vehicle speed.
– Navigation instructions.
– Check Control messages.
– Selection list from the instrument clus-
ter.
– Driver assistance systems.
Seite 132
CONTROLS Displays
132
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Some of this information is only displayed
briefly as needed.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Displayed information"
6. Select the desired displays in the Head-
up Display.
Settings are stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to
the ambient brightness.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Brightness"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired
brightness is set.
7. Press the Controller.
When the low beams are switched on, the
brightness of the Head-up Display can be
additionally influenced using the instru-
ment lighting, refer to page 139.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Adjusting the height
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Height"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired
height is reached.
7. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Setting the rotation
The screen of the Head-up Display can be
rotated around its own axis.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Rotation"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired set-
ting is selected.
7. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Display visibility
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
Display is influenced by the following fac-
tors:
– Certain sitting positions.
– Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis-
play.
– Sunglasses with certain polarization fil-
ters.
Seite 133
Displays CONTROLS
133
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
– Wet roads.
– Unfavorable light conditions.
Vehicle status
General information
The status can be displayed and actions per-
formed for several systems.
Opening the vehicle status
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
Information at a glance
Symbols Description
"Flat Tire Monitor": status of
the run-flat tires, refer to
page 150.
"Tire Pressure Monitor": sta-
tus of the Tire Pressure
Monitor TPM, refer to
page 145.
"Check Control": Check Con-
trol messages are stored in
the background and can be
displayed on the Control
Display. Displaying stored
Check Control messages, re-
fer to page 124.
"Service required": display-
ing service notifications, re-
fer to page 126.
"Teleservice Call": Serv-
ice Request.
Seite 134
CONTROLS Displays
134
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Lights
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and
functions that are not necessarily available
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Overview
Switches in the vehicle
The light switch element is located next to
the steering wheel.
Symbol Function
Front fog lights.
Automatic headlight control.
Cornering light.
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
Symbol Function
Parking lights.
Low beams.
Instrument lighting.
Parking lights, low beams and
roadside parking lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver's door is opened when standby
state is switched off, the exterior lighting is
automatically switched off.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended
periods; otherwise, they might drain the
battery and it would then be impossible to
switch on drive-ready state.
When parking, switch on the one-sided
roadside parking light, refer to page 136.
Low beams
Position of switch:
The low beams illuminate when standby
state is switched on.
Seite 135
Lights CONTROLS
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Canada: roadside parking light
Concept
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
Switching on
With radio-ready state switched off, press
the lever either up or down past the resist-
ance point for approx. 2 seconds.
Switching off
Briefly press the lever to the resistance
point in the opposite direction.
Welcome lights and pathway
lighting
Welcome lights
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment and
the ambient brightness, individual light
functions may be switched on briefly when
the vehicle is unlocked.
Activating/deactivating
Position of switch: ,
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "Welcome lights"
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Pathway lighting
General information
The low beams stay lit for a short while if
the headlight flasher is switched on after
the vehicle's radio-ready state is switched
off.
Setting the duration
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "Pathway lighting"
6. Set length of time.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Automatic headlight control
Concept
The low beams are switched on and off au-
tomatically depending on the ambient
brightness, for example in tunnels, in twi-
light or if there is precipitation.
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon
can cause the lights to be switched on.
Activating
Position of switch:
Seite 136
CONTROLS Lights
136
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
The indicator light in the instrument cluster
is illuminated when the low beams are
switched on.
System limits
The automatic headlight control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal judg-
ment of lighting conditions.
For example, the sensors are unable to de-
tect fog or hazy weather. In these situa-
tions, switch the lights on manually.
Daytime running lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
The daytime running lights light up when
standby state is switched on. After standby
state is switched off, the parking lights light
up in position .
Activating/deactivating
In some countries, daytime running lights
are mandatory, so it may not be possible to
deactivate the daytime running lights.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the currently used
vehicle key.
Cornering light
General information
Position of switch:
In tight curves, for instance on mountain-
ous roads or when turning, an additional,
cornering light is switched on that lights up
the inside of the curve when the vehicle is
moving below a certain speed.
The cornering light is automatically
switched on depending on the steering an-
gle or, where applicable, the use of turn sig-
nals.
When driving in reverse, the cornering
lights may be automatically switched on re-
gardless of the steering angle.
Adaptive headlight range con-
trol
The adaptive headlight range control fea-
ture balances out acceleration and braking
processes as well as the vehicle load condi-
tions in order to avoid dazzling oncoming
traffic. Illumination of the road is optimized.
High-beam Assistant
Concept
The high-beam Assistant detects other traf-
fic participants early on and automatically
switches the high beams on or off depend-
ing on the traffic situation.
General information
The high-beam Assistant ensures that the
high beams are switched on, whenever the
traffic situation allows. In the low speed
range, the high beams are not switched on
by the system.
The system responds to light from oncom-
ing traffic and traffic driving ahead of you,
and to ambient lighting, for instance in
towns and cities.
Seite 137
Lights CONTROLS
137
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
The high beams can be switched on and off
manually at any time.
Activating/deactivating
Position of switch:
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the low
beams are switched on.
The headlights are automatically switched
between low beams and high beams.
The blue indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster lights up when the sys-
tem switches on the high beams.
The high-beam Assistant is deactivated
when manually switching the high beams
on and off, refer to page 109.
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant,
press the button on the turn signal lever.
System limits
The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver's personal judg-
ment of when to use the high beams. In sit-
uation that require this, therefore switch off
manually.
The system is not fully functional in the fol-
lowing situations, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
– In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
– When detecting poorly-lit road users
such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback
riders and wagons; when driving close
to train or ship traffic; or at animal
crossings.
– In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres-
sions, in crossing traffic or half-ob-
scured oncoming traffic on highways.
– In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
– When the windshield in front of the in-
terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov-
ered with stickers, etc.
Fog lights
Front fog lights
Concept
The front fog lights work alongside the low
beams to illuminate a wider area of the
roadway.
Functional requirement
The low beams must be switched on before
switching on the front fog lights.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The green indicator light lights up if
the front fog lights are switched on.
If the automatic headlight control, refer to
page 136, is activated, the low beams will
come on automatically when you switch on
the front fog lights.
When the high beams or headlight flasher
are activated, the front fog lights are not
switched on.
Seite 138
CONTROLS Lights
138
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Instrument lighting
Functional requirement
The parking lights or low beams must be
switched on to adjust the brightness.
Adjusting
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel.
Interior lights
General information
Depending on the equipment, the interior
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, and cour-
tesy lights are controlled automatically.
The thumbwheel for the instrument lighting
controls brightness of some of these fea-
tures.
Overview
1 Interior lights
2 Reading lights
3 Ambient light
Switching the interior lights on/off
Press the button.
To switch off permanently: press the button
and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
Switching the reading lights on and
off manually
Press the button.
The reading lights are located in the front
next to the interior light.
Ambient light
General information
Depending on the equipment version, light-
ing can be adjusted for some lights in the
car's interior.
Activating/deactivating
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Ambient lighting"
6. Select the desired setting.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Changing color
Push the switch forward or back:
manual color change.
Press the switch forward or back-
ward and hold for approx. 3 seconds,
until the ambient light illuminates
Seite 139
Lights CONTROLS
139
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
several times: automatic color change. Push
the switch again to end color changes.
Setting the brightness
Depending on the equipment, the bright-
ness of the ambient light can be adjusted
via the thumbwheel for the instrument
lighting or on the Control Display.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Brightness"
6. Adjust the brightness.
Seite 140
CONTROLS Lights
140
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Safety
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and
functions that are not necessarily available
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag
4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbag
Front airbags
Front airbags help protect the driver and
the front passenger by responding to frontal
impacts in which safety belts alone would
not provide adequate protection.
Side airbag
In the event of a side impact, the side air-
bag protects the side of the body in the
chest and lap area.
Seite 141
Safety CONTROLS
141
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Head airbag
In the event of a side impact, the head air-
bag protects the head.
Ejection Mitigation
The head airbag system is designed as an
ejection mitigation countermeasure to re-
duce the likelihood of ejections of vehicle
occupants through side windows during
rollovers or side impact events.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag protects the legs in the
event of a frontal impact.
Protective effect
Airbags are not triggered in every impact
situation, for instance in less severe acci-
dents or rear-end collisions.
Information on optimum effect of the
airbags
Warning
If the seat position is incorrect or the de-
ployment area of the airbags is impaired,
the airbag system cannot provide protec-
tion as intended and may cause additional
injuries due to triggering. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. Follow the in-
formation on achieving the optimum pro-
tective effect of the airbag system.
– Keep a distance from the airbags.
– Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at
the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to
keep the risk of injury to your hands or
arms as low as possible when the airbag
is triggered.
– Make sure that the front passenger is
sitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her
feet and legs in the floor area and does
not support them on the dashboard.
– Make sure that occupants keep their
heads away from the side airbag.
– There should be no additional persons,
animals or objects between an airbag
and a person.
– Dashboard and windshield on the front
passenger side must stay clear - do not
attach adhesive labels or coverings and
do not attach brackets or cables, for in-
stance for GPS devices or mobile
phones.
– Do not apply adhesive materials to the
airbag cover panels, do not cover them
or modify them in any way.
– Do not use the cover of the front airbag
on the front passenger side as a storage
area.
– Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions
or other objects to the front passenger
seat that are not specifically suited for
seats with integrated side airbags.
– Do not place seat cushions or other ob-
jects on the front seats that are not spe-
cifically suited for seats with integrated
side airbags.
– Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
– Never modify either the individual com-
ponents or the wiring in the airbag sys-
tem. This also applies to steering wheel
covers, the dashboard, and the seats.
– Do not remove the airbag system.
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags
cannot be fully ruled out in certain situa-
tions.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.
Vehicle modifications for a person with dis-
abilities may affect the air bag system; con-
Seite 142
CONTROLS Safety
142
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
tact MINI Customer Relations for further in-
formation.
Warnings and information on the airbags
are also found on the sun visors.
Functional readiness of the airbag
system
Safety information
Warning
Individual components can be hot after
triggering of the airbag system. There is a
risk of injury. Do not touch individual
components.
Warning
Improperly executed work can lead to fail-
ure, malfunction or unintentional trigger-
ing of the airbag system. In the case of a
malfunction, the airbag system might not
trigger as intended despite the accident
severity. There is a risk of injuries or dan-
ger to life. Have the airbag system
checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap-
ped by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Correct function
With the standby state switched on,
the warning light in the instrument
cluster lights up briefly, indicating
the airbag system and belt tensioner are
functional.
Airbag system malfunctioning
– Warning light does not come on when
standby state is switched on.
– The warning light lights up continu-
ously.
Automatic deactivation of the
front-seat passenger airbags
Concept
The system reads if the front passenger seat
is occupied by measuring the human body's
resistance.
Front, knee, and side airbag on the front
passenger's side are activated or deacti-
vated.
General information
Before transporting a child on the front pas-
senger seat, refer to the safety information
and instructions for children on the front
passenger seat, see Children.
Safety information
Warning
To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag
function, the system must be able to de-
tect whether a person is sitting in the
front passenger seat. The entire seat cush-
ion area must be used for this purpose.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the front passenger keeps
his or her feet in the floor area.
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and
adults, the front-seat passenger airbags may
be deactivated in certain sitting positions.
In this case, the indicator light for the front-
seat passenger airbags lights up.
In this case, change the sitting position so
that the front-seat passenger airbags are ac-
tivated and the indicator light goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags,
have the person sit in the rear.
Seite 143
Safety CONTROLS
143
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
To enable correct recognition of the occu-
pied seat cushion.
– Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
or other items to the front passenger
seat unless they are specifically deter-
mined to be safe for use on the front
passenger seat.
– Do not place any electronic devices on
the front passenger seat if a child re-
straint system is to be installed on it.
– Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
– No moisture in or on the seat.
Indicator light for the front-seat
passenger airbags
The indicator light for the front-seat passen-
ger airbags indicates the operating state of
the front-seat passenger airbags.
The light indicates whether the airbags are
either activated or deactivated.
– The indicator light lights
up when a child is properly
seated in a child restraint
system or when the seat is
empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are
not activated.
– The indicator light does not light up
when, for instance a correctly seated
person of sufficient size is detected on
the seat. The airbags on the front pas-
senger side are activated.
Detected child restraint systems
The system generally detects children
seated in a child restraint system, particu-
larly in child restraint systems required by
NHTSA at the point in time when the vehi-
cle was manufactured. After installing a
child restraint system, make sure that the
indicator light for the front-seat passenger
airbags lights up. This indicates that the
child restraint system has been detected
and the front-seat passenger airbags are not
activated.
Strength of the driver's and front-
seat passenger airbag
The explosive power that activates driver's/
front-seat passenger airbags very much de-
pends on the positions of the driver's/front
passenger seat.
To maintain the accuracy of this function
over the long-term, calibrate the front seats
as soon as a relevant Check Control mes-
sage is displayed. A message also appears
on the Control Display.
Calibrating the front seats
Warning
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
area of movement of the seat is clear prior
to any adjustment.
An appropriate Check Control message is
displayed.
1. Move the respective seat all the way for-
ward.
2. Move the respective seat forward again.
The seat moves forward briefly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired posi-
tion.
Seite 144
CONTROLS Safety
144
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
The calibration procedure is completed
when the Check Control message disap-
pears.
If the message continues to be displayed,
repeat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a re-
peat calibration, have the system checked
as soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Concept
The system monitors tire inflation pressure
in the four mounted tires. The system warns
you if there is a significant loss of pressure
in one or more tires.
General information
Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire
inflation pressure and, depending on the
model, the tire temperature.
Further information and instructions on us-
ing the system can also be found under Tire
inflation pressure, refer to page 227.
Functional requirements
The following conditions must be met for
the system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a
loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured:
– After a tire or wheel replacement, a re-
set was performed with the correct tire
inflation pressure.
– After the tire inflation pressure was ad-
justed to a new value, a reset was per-
formed.
– Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.
Status display
Current status
The system status can be displayed on the
Control Display, e.g., whether or not the sys-
tem is active.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
The current status is displayed.
Tire conditions
General information
Tire and system status are indicated by the
color of the wheels and a SMS text message
on the Control Display.
All wheels green
System is active and will issue a warning re-
lated to the tire inflation pressures stored
during the last reset.
One to four yellow wheels
A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation
pressure has occurred in the indicated tires.
Gray wheels
It may not be possible to identify tire infla-
tion pressure losses.
Possible causes:
– Malfunction.
– The system is being reset.
Additional information
The status control display additionally
shows the current tire inflation pressures.
The values shown are instantaneous meas-
urements and may vary depending on driv-
ing style or weather conditions.
Seite 145
Safety CONTROLS
145
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Resetting the system
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not
drive off.
5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform
reset".
6. Drive away.
The wheels are displayed in gray and the
following is displayed "Resetting Tire
Pressure Monitor…".
After a travel time of several minutes, the
set tire inflation pressures are accepted as
reference values. The resetting process is
completed automatically while driving.
After successful completion of the reset, the
tires appear in green on the Control Display
and "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See label
for recommended pressures." is displayed.
You may interrupt this trip at any time.
When you continue the reset resumes auto-
matically.
Messages
General information
A low tire inflation pressure may cause the
DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be
switched on.
Safety information
Warning
A damaged regular tire with low or miss-
ing tire inflation pressure impacts han-
dling, such as steering and braking re-
sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limited
stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not
continue driving if the vehicle is equipped
with normal tires. Follow the information
on run-flat tires and continued driving
with these tires.
If a tire inflation pressure check is
required
Message
A symbol with a Check Control message ap-
pears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
The system has detected a
wheel change, but no reset was
done.
No reset was performed for the
system. The system issues a
warning based on the tire infla-
tion pressures stored during the
last reset.
Inflation was not carried out ac-
cording to specifications.
The tire inflation pressure has
fallen below the level of the last
reset.
Measure
1. Check the tire pressure and correct as
needed.
2. Reset the system.
If the tire inflation pressure is too low
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated
in the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control
message appears on the Control Display.
Seite 146
CONTROLS Safety
146
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Symbol Possible cause
There is a tire inflation pressure
loss.
No reset was performed for the
system. The system issues a
warning based on the tire infla-
tion pressures stored during the
last reset.
Measure
1. Reduce your speed and drive moder-
ately. Do not exceed a speed of
80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas
station, check and correct the tire infla-
tion pressure in all four tires, if neces-
sary.
3. Reset the system.
If there is a significant loss of tire
inflation pressure
Message
A yellow warning light is illuminated
in the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with the affected tire
appears in a Check Control message on the
Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major
loss in tire inflation pressure.
No reset was performed for the
system. The system issues a
warning based on the tire infla-
tion pressures stored during the
last reset.
Measure
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-
neuvers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 233, are la-
beled with a circular symbol containing
the letters RSC marked on the tire's
sidewall.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1. Identify the damaged tire.
To do this, check the tire inflation pres-
sure in all four tires, for instance using
the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni-
tor may not have been reset. In this
case, perform the reset.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor
may not have been initialized. In this
case, initialize the system.
If identification of flat tire damage is
not possible, please contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified serv-
ice center or repair shop.
2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire
kit or by changing the wheel.
Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire
kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics.
In this case, have the electronics checked
and replaced at the next opportunity.
Seite 147
Safety CONTROLS
147
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Run-flat tires
Safety information
Warning
The vehicle handles differently when a
run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire
pressure; for instance, reduced lane stabil-
ity when braking, braking distances are
longer and the self-steering properties will
change. There is a risk of accident. Drive
moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged
tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-
neuvers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all
four tires at the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni-
tor may not have been reset. In this
case, perform the reset.
Possible driving range with a
depressurized tire
The distance for which it may be possible to
drive safely varies depending on how the
vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road
conditions, external temperature. The driv-
ing range may be less but may also be more
if an economical driving style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average
weight and used under favorable conditions,
the distance for which it may be safe to
drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will
handle differently, potentially leading to
conditions such as the following:
– Greater likelihood of swerving off
course.
– Longer braking distances.
– Changed self-steering properties.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt
steering maneuvers or driving over obsta-
cles, for instance curbs or potholes.
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci-
dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
System limits
Temperature
The tire inflation pressure depends on the
tire's temperature.
Driving or exposure to the sun will increase
the tire's temperature, thus increasing the
tire inflation pressure.
The tire inflation pressure is reduced when
the tire temperature falls again.
These circumstances may cause a warning
when temperatures fall very sharply.
Sudden tire pressure loss
The system cannot indicate sudden serious
tire damage caused by external circumstan-
ces.
Seite 148
CONTROLS Safety
148
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Failure performing a reset
The system does not function properly if a
reset has not been carried out, for instance
a flat tire is reported though tire inflation
pressures are correct.
Malfunction
The yellow warning light flashes and
is then illuminated continuously. A
Check Control message is displayed.
It may not be possible to identify tire pres-
sure losses.
Examples and recommendations in the fol-
lowing situations:
– A wheel without TPM wheel electronics
is mounted: have it checked by a deal-
er’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop as needed.
– Malfunction: have system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
– The system was unable to complete the
reset. Perform a system reset again.
– Interference caused by systems or devi-
ces with the same radio frequency: after
leaving the area of the interference, the
system automatically becomes active
again.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la-
bel. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.) As an added safety
feature, your vehicle has been equipped
with a tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-
heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-infla-
tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle's han-
dling and stopping ability. Please note that
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been
equipped with a TPMS malfunction indica-
tor to indicate when the system is not oper-
ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indi-
cator is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a mal-
function, the telltale will flash for approxi-
mately one minute and then remain contin-
uously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS mal-
functions may occur for a variety of rea-
sons, including the installation of replace-
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func-
tioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to en-
sure that the replacement or alternate tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
Seite 149
Safety CONTROLS
149
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
Concept
The system detects tire inflation pressure
loss on the basis of rotation speed differen-
ces between the individual wheels while
driving.
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss,
the diameter and therefore the rotational
speed of the corresponding wheel changes.
The difference will be detected and reported
as a flat tire.
The system does not measure the actual in-
flation pressure in the tires.
Functional requirements
The following conditions must be met for
the system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a
loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured:
– After a tire or wheel replacement, an ini-
tialization was performed with the cor-
rect tire inflation pressure.
– After the tire pressure was adjusted to a
new value, an initialization was per-
formed.
Status display
The current status of the flat tire monitor
can be displayed, for instance whether the
RPA is active.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Initialization required
An initialization must be performed in the
following situations:
– After the tire inflation pressure has
been adjusted.
– After a tire or wheel replacement.
Performing initialization
When initializing, the set tire inflation
pressures serve as reference values in order
to detect a flat tire. Initialization is started
by confirming the tire inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving
with snow chains.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not
drive off.
5. Start the initialization with: "Perform
reset".
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driv-
ing, which can be interrupted at any time.
The initialization automatically continues
when driving resumes.
Messages
General information
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic
Stability Control is switched on, if needed.
Safety information
Warning
A damaged regular tire with low or miss-
ing tire inflation pressure impacts han-
dling, such as steering and braking re-
sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limited
stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not
continue driving if the vehicle is equipped
with normal tires. Follow the information
Seite 150
CONTROLS Safety
150
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
on run-flat tires and continued driving
with these tires.
Indication of a flat tire
A yellow warning light is illuminated
in the instrument cluster.
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control
message appears on the Control Display.
Symbol Possible cause
There is a flat tire or a major
loss in tire inflation pressure.
Measure
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-
neuvers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
normal tires or run-flat tires.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 233, are la-
beled with a circular symbol containing
the letters RSC marked on the tire's
sidewall.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Normal tires
1. Identify the damaged tire.
To do this, check the tire inflation pres-
sure in all four tires, for instance using
the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni-
tor may not have been reset. In this
case, perform the reset.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor
may not have been initialized. In this
case, initialize the system.
If identification of flat tire damage is
not possible, please contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified serv-
ice center or repair shop.
2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire
kit or by changing the wheel.
Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire
kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics.
In this case, have the electronics checked
and replaced at the next opportunity.
Run-flat tires
Safety information
Warning
The vehicle handles differently when a
run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire
pressure; for instance, reduced lane stabil-
ity when braking, braking distances are
longer and the self-steering properties will
change. There is a risk of accident. Drive
moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged
tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Continued driving with a flat tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-
neuvers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all
four tires at the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor
may not have been initialized. In this
case, initialize the system.
Seite 151
Safety CONTROLS
151
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Possible driving range with a
depressurized tire
The distance for which it may be possible to
drive safely varies depending on how the
vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road
conditions, external temperature. The driv-
ing range may be less but may also be more
if an economical driving style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average
weight and used under favorable conditions,
the distance for which it may be safe to
drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will
handle differently, potentially leading to
conditions such as the following:
– Greater likelihood of swerving off
course.
– Longer braking distances.
– Changed self-steering properties.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt
steering maneuvers or driving over obsta-
cles, for instance curbs or potholes.
Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci-
dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
System limits
The system could be delayed or malfunction
in the following situations:
– A natural, even tire inflation pressure
loss in all four tires will not be recog-
nized. Therefore, check the tire inflation
pressure regularly.
– Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external circumstances cannot be recog-
nized in advance.
– When the system has not been initial-
ized.
– When driving on a snowy or slippery
road surface.
– Sporty driving style: spinning traction
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drift-
ing).
– When driving with snow chains.
Intelligent Safety
Concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation
of the driver assistance systems.
The intelligent safety systems can help pre-
vent an imminent collision.
– Approach control warning with City
light braking function, refer to
page 153.
– Daytime pedestrian collision mitigation,
refer to page 157.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing visibility and traffic situation.
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where ap-
propriate.
Seite 152
CONTROLS Safety
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judg-
ment. Due to its limits, the system may not
issue warnings or reactions, or these may
be issued late or in a manner that is not
consistent with their normal use. There is
a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Warning
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/
towing with the Intelligent Safety systems
activated. There is a risk of accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off
prior to tow-starting/towing.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Switching on/off
Some Intelligent Safety systems are auto-
matically active after every departure. Some
Intelligent Safety systems activate accord-
ing to the last setting.
Press button briefly:
– The menu for the Intelligent
Safety system is displayed. The
systems are individually
switched off according to their
respective settings.
– LED lights up orange or goes out respec-
tive to their individual settings.
Adjust the settings as needed. The individ-
ual settings are stored for the driver profile
currently in use.
Press button again:
– All Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on.
– The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
– All Intelligent Safety systems
are switched off.
– The LED goes out.
Approach control warning
with city light braking func-
tion
Concept
The system may prevent some accidents. In
the event of an accident, the system may re-
duce impact speed.
The system sounds a warning before an im-
minent collision and activates brakes inde-
pendently, if needed.
The Brake Assistant function activates and
applies the brakes with limited force and
duration.
A camera at the base of the interior mirror
controls the system.
The approach control warning is available
even if cruise control has been deactivated.
Seite 153
Safety CONTROLS
153
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
With the vehicle approaching another vehi-
cle intentionally, the approach control warn-
ing and braking are delayed in order to
avoid false system reactions.
General information
The system warns at two levels of an immi-
nent danger of collision at speeds from ap-
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warn-
ings may vary with the current driving
situation.
Braking is performed at speeds up to ap-
proximately 35 mph/60 km/h.
Detection range
Objects that the system can detect are
taken into account.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing visibility and traffic situation.
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where ap-
propriate.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judg-
ment. Due to its limits, the system may not
issue warnings or reactions, or these may
be issued late or in a manner that is not
consistent with their normal use. There is
a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Warning
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/
towing with the Intelligent Safety systems
activated. There is a risk of accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off
prior to tow-starting/towing.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Seite 154
CONTROLS Safety
154
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior
mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior
mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after ev-
ery driving off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
– The menu for the Intelligent
Safety system is displayed. The
systems are individually
switched off according to their
respective settings.
– LED lights up orange or goes out respec-
tive to their individual settings.
Adjust the settings as needed. The individ-
ual settings are stored for the driver profile
currently in use.
Press button again:
– All Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on.
– The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
– All Intelligent Safety systems
are switched off.
– The LED goes out.
Setting the warning time
The warning time can be set via the Central
Information Display (CID).
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Warning time"
5. Select the desired setting.
The selected warning time is stored for the
driver profile currently in use.
Warning with braking function
Display
A warning symbol appears in the instru-
ment cluster and in the Head-up Display if a
collision with a detected vehicle is immi-
nent.
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarn-
ing.
Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an
acoustic signal sounds: acute
warning.
Brake and make an evasive ma-
neuver, if necessary.
Prewarning
This warning is provided, for instance when
there is impending danger of a collision or
the distance to the vehicle ahead is too
small.
If a prewarning is provided, respond by
braking as warranted.
Seite 155
Safety CONTROLS
155
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Acute warning with braking function
An acute warning is displayed when there
is an imminent danger of collision due to
the vehicle approaching another object at a
high speed.
The driver must intervene actively when
there is an acute warning. If necessary, the
driver is assisted by a minor automatic
braking intervention in a possible risk of
collision.
Acute warnings may be provided even when
there has been no prior warning.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver to inter-
vene. During a warning, the maximum brak-
ing force is used. In order to activate the
Brake Assistant function, you must apply
the brakes quickly and forcefully. If there is
a risk of collision, the system may assist
with braking. When the vehicle is traveling
at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a
complete stop.
The braking intervention can be interrupted
by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by
actively moving the steering wheel.
The system’s ability to detect objects may
be limited in some circumstances. Refer to
the information in this Owner’s Manual re-
garding the limitations of the system and
actively intervene as warranted.
System limits
Safety information
Warning
The system is designed to operate in cer-
tain conditions and circumstances. Due to
conditions or other factors, the system
may not respond. There may be a risk of
accident or risk of damage to property. Ac-
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the
information in this Owner’s Manual re-
garding the scope of the system’s opera-
tion and limitations.
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
The following situations may not be de-
tected, for example:
– Slow moving vehicles when you ap-
proach them at high speed.
– Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front
of you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
– Vehicles with an unusual rear appear-
ance.
– Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in
the following situations:
– In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
fall.
– In tight curves.
– If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield is dirty or covered.
– If the driving stability control systems
are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
– Up to 10 seconds after activating the
drive-ready state via the Start/Stop but-
ton.
– During calibration of the camera imme-
diately after vehicle delivery.
– If there are constant blinding effects be-
cause of oncoming light, for instance
from the sun low in the sky.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings
are, the more warnings are displayed.
Therefore, there may also be an excess of
Seite 156
CONTROLS Safety
156
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
premature or unjustified warnings and reac-
tions.
Daytime pedestrian collision
mitigation
Concept
The system may prevent some accidents
with pedestrians.
When driving at city speeds, the system
will issue a warning if there is imminent
risk of a collision with pedestrians, and sup-
port this with a light braking function.
The camera at the base of the interior mir-
ror controls the system.
General information
In sufficiently bright conditions, the system
issues a warning of a possible risk of colli-
sion with pedestrians in the speed range
from approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx.
35 mph/60 km/h
The system reacts to people who are within
the detection range of the system.
Detection range
The detection area in front of the vehicle is
divided into two areas:
– Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of
the vehicle.
– Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left of the central area.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo-
cated within the central area. A warning is
issued about pedestrians who are located
within the extended area only if they are
moving in the direction of the central area.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing visibility and traffic situation.
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where ap-
propriate.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judg-
ment. Due to its limits, the system may not
issue warnings or reactions, or these may
be issued late or in a manner that is not
consistent with their normal use. There is
a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Warning
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/
towing with the Intelligent Safety systems
activated. There is a risk of accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off
prior to tow-starting/towing.
Seite 157
Safety CONTROLS
157
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The camera is installed near the interior
mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior
mirror clean and clear.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after ev-
ery driving off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button briefly:
– The menu for the Intelligent
Safety system is displayed. The
systems are individually
switched off according to their
respective settings.
– LED lights up orange or goes out respec-
tive to their individual settings.
Adjust the settings as needed. The individ-
ual settings are stored for the driver profile
currently in use.
Press button again:
– All Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on.
– The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:
– All Intelligent Safety systems
are switched off.
– The LED goes out.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a detected person is im-
minent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Dis-
play.
The red symbol is displayed and a
signal sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or
make an evasive maneuver.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver to inter-
vene. During a warning, the maximum brak-
ing force is used. In order to activate the
Brake Assistant function, you must apply
the brakes quickly and forcefully. If there is
a risk of collision, the system may assist
with braking. When the vehicle is traveling
at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a
complete stop.
Seite 158
CONTROLS Safety
158
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
The braking intervention can be interrupted
by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by
actively moving the steering wheel.
The system’s ability to detect objects may
be limited in some circumstances. Refer to
the information in this Owner’s Manual re-
garding the limitations of the system and
actively intervene as warranted.
System limits
Safety information
Warning
The system is designed to operate in cer-
tain conditions and circumstances. Due to
conditions or other factors, the system
may not respond. There may be a risk of
accident or risk of damage to property. Ac-
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the
information in this Owner’s Manual re-
garding the scope of the system’s opera-
tion and limitations.
Detection range
The detection potential of the camera is lim-
ited.
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be
issued late.
The following situations may not be de-
tected, for example:
– Partially covered pedestrians.
– Pedestrians that are not detected as
such because of the viewing angle or
contour.
– Pedestrians outside of the detection
range.
– Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or
may not be available in the following situa-
tions:
– In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
fall.
– In tight curves.
– If the field of view of the camera or the
windshield is dirty or covered.
– If the driving stability control systems
are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
– Up to 10 seconds after activating the
drive-ready state via the Start/Stop but-
ton.
– During calibration of the camera imme-
diately after vehicle delivery.
– If there are constant blinding effects be-
cause of oncoming light, for instance
from the sun low in the sky.
– When it is dark outside.
Fatigue alert
Concept
The system can detect decreasing alertness
or fatigue of the driver during long, monoto-
nous trips, for instance on highways. In this
situation, it is recommended that the driver
takes a break.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing one's physical state. An increasing
lack of alertness or fatigue may not be de-
tected or not be detected in time. There is
a risk of accident. Make sure that the
Seite 159
Safety CONTROLS
159
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions.
Function
The system is switched on each time the en-
gine is started and cannot be switched off.
After travel has begun, the system monitors
certain aspects of the driver's behavior, so
that decreasing alertness or fatigue can be
detected.
This procedure takes the following criteria
into account:
– Personal driving style, for instance
steering behavior.
– Driving conditions, for instance time,
length of trip.
Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h,
the system is active and can display a rec-
ommendation to take a break.
Break recommendation
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued,
a message is displayed in the Control Dis-
play with the recommendation to take a
break.
A recommendation to take a break is dis-
played only once during an uninterrupted
trip.
After a break, another recommendation to
take a break cannot be displayed until after
approximately 45 minutes.
System limits
The function may be limited in the follow-
ing situations and may issue an incorrect
warning or no warning at all:
– When the clock is set incorrectly.
– When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
– With a sporty driving style, such as dur-
ing rapid acceleration or when corner-
ing fast.
– In active driving situations, such as
when changing lanes frequently.
– When the road surface is poor.
– In the event of strong side winds.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes af-
ter parking the vehicle, for instance in the
case of a break during longer trips on high-
ways.
PostCrash – iBrake
Concept
In the event of an accident, the system can
bring the vehicle to a halt automatically
without intervention by the driver in cer-
tain situations. This can reduce the risk of a
further collision and the consequences
thereof.
At standstill
After coming to a halt, the brake is released
automatically. Secure the vehicle against
rolling.
Harder vehicle braking
In certain situations, it can be necessary to
bring the vehicle to a halt more quickly than
the Brake Assistant allows.
To do this, quickly apply extra force to the
brake. For a brief period, the braking pres-
sure will be higher than the braking pres-
sure that is achieved by the automatic brak-
ing function. This interrupts automatic
braking.
Seite 160
CONTROLS Safety
160
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Interrupting automatic braking
It can be necessary to interrupt automatic
braking in certain situations, for instance
for an evasive maneuver.
Interrupt automatic braking:
– By pressing the brake pedal.
– By pressing the accelerator pedal.
Seite 161
Safety CONTROLS
161
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and
functions that are not necessarily available
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Antilock Braking System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking.
The vehicle maintains its steering power
even during full brake applications, which
increases the active safety.
ABS is ready when vehicle is ready to drive.
Brake assistant
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this sys-
tem automatically boosts the vehicle brak-
ing capability to the furthest possible ex-
tent. It reduces the braking distance to a
minimum during an emergency stop. This
system utilizes all of the capabilities pro-
vided by the Antilock Brake System ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake
pedal for the duration of the emergency
stop.
Energy recovery
General information
In the event of danger, such as with locked
wheels, energy recovery is reduced in order
to prevent unstable driving situations.
Safety information
Warning
Without energy recovery, there is no brak-
ing power of the electric motor available.
The vehicle could roll further than antici-
pated. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
Concept
Within the physical limits, the system helps
to keep the vehicle on a steady course by
reducing engine speed and by applying
brakes to the individual wheels.
General information
DSC detects the following unstable driving
conditions, for instance:
– Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteer-
ing.
– Loss of traction of the front wheels,
which can lead to understeering.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
page 163, is a version of the DSC where for-
ward momentum is optimized.
Seite 162
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
162
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing the traffic conditions. Based on
the limits of the system, it cannot inde-
pendently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where ap-
propriate.
Warning
When driving with a roof load, for in-
stance with roof-mounted luggage rack,
the vehicle's center of gravity is higher,
which increases the risk of the vehicle tip-
ping in critical driving situations. There
may be a risk of accident or risk of damage
to property. Do not deactivate DSC Dy-
namic Stability Control when driving with
roof load.
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator light flashes: DSC con-
trols the drive and braking forces.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has
malfunctioned.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
General information
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability
is reduced during acceleration and when
driving in curves.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
again as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Press and hold this button but not
longer than approx. 10 seconds, un-
til the indicator light for DSC OFF
lights up in the instrument cluster and dis-
plays DSC OFF.
DSC is switched off.
Activating DSC
Press the button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
light go out.
Indicator/warning lights
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis-
played in the instrument cluster.
The indicator light lights up: DSC is
deactivated.
Automatic activation
When DSC is deactivated, automatic activa-
tion occurs in the following situations:
– The vehicle has a flat tire.
– When activating cruise control in the
TRACTION or DSC OFF settings.
DTC Dynamic Traction Con-
trol
Concept
DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stabil-
ity Control where forward momentum is op-
timized.
The system ensures maximum headway on
special road conditions, for instance unp-
lowed snowy roads or loose road surfaces,
but with somewhat limited vehicle stability.
Seite 163
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
163
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has
maximum traction. Driving stability is lim-
ited during acceleration and when driving
in curves.
Drive carefully.
You may find it useful to briefly activate
DTC under the following special circum-
stances:
– When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
– When driving off from deep snow or
loose ground.
– When driving with snow chains.
Deactivating/activating DTC
Dynamic Traction Control
Activating DTC
Press the button.
TRACTION is displayed in the in-
strument cluster and the indicator light for
DSC OFF lights up.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica-
tor light go out.
Performance Control
Performance Control enhances the agility of
the vehicle.
To increase maneuverability, wheels are
braked individually when a sporty driving
style is used.
MINI Driving Modes switch
Concept
The MINI Driving Modes switch helps to
fine-tune the vehicle's settings and features.
Choose between four different programs.
Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch
will activate the particular program.
Operating the programs
Switch Program
SPORT
MID
GREEN
GREEN+
MID
MID provides balanced tuning.
With each starting operation, MID is acti-
vated using the Start/Stop button.
GREEN
Concept
GREEN provides consumption reducing tun-
ing for increased range.
Activating GREEN
Press the MINI Driving Modes switch up-
ward or downward until GREEN is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
Configuring GREEN
Via MINI Driving Modes switch
1. Activate GREEN.
2. "Configure GREEN"
3. Configure the program.
Seite 164
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
164
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
This configuration is retrieved when
GREEN is activated.
Via the Central Information Display (CID)
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Driving mode"
4. "Configure GREEN"
5. Select the desired setting.
This configuration is retrieved when
GREEN is activated.
GREEN+
Concept
GREEN provides consistent tuning to maxi-
mize range.
During the activation, some comfort func-
tions will also be limited or deactivated.
Activating GREEN+
Press the MINI Driving Modes switch up-
ward or downward until GREEN+ is dis-
played in the instrument cluster.
SPORT
Concept
Consistently sporty tuning of the drivetrain
for greater driving agility.
Activating SPORT
Press the MINI Driving Modes switch up-
ward or downward until SPORT is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
Configuring driving program
Settings can be made for the following driv-
ing programs in Driving mode:
– GREEN, refer to page 164.
– SPORT, refer to page 165.
Displays
Program selection
Pressing the MINI Driving
Modes switch displays a list of
programs, which can be se-
lected.
Selected program
The instrument cluster dis-
plays the selected program.
Drive-off assistant
Concept
This system supports driving off on uphill
grades. The parking brake is not required.
Driving off with the drive-off
assistant
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off
without delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle
is held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Servotronic
Servotronic is a speed-dependent power
steering function.
The system provides the steering force with
more support at low speeds than at higher
ones. This makes it easier to park, for in-
stance, and makes steering firmer when
driving at faster speeds.
Seite 165
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
165
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Furthermore, the steering force adapts ac-
cording to the driving program, so that a
firm, sporty feel or a comfortable steering
response is conveyed.
Seite 166
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
166
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and
functions that are not necessarily available
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Cruise control
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed can be
adjusted using the buttons on the steering
wheel. The system maintains the desired
speed. The system accelerates and brakes
automatically as needed.
General information
The system is functional at speeds begin-
ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
Depending on the settings, the cruise con-
trol settings many change under certain
conditions.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing the traffic conditions. Based on
the limits of the system, it cannot inde-
pendently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where ap-
propriate.
Warning
The use of the system can lead to an in-
creased risk of accidents in the following
situations, for instance:
– On winding roads.
– In heavy traffic.
– On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or
wet conditions, or on a loose road
surface.
There may be a risk of accident or risk of
damage to property. Only use the system if
driving at constant speed is possible.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Cruise control on/off, refer to
page 168.
Store speed, refer to page 168.
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 168.
Continue cruise control with the
last setting, refer to page 169.
Increase speed, refer to
page 168.
Reduce speed, refer to page 168.
Seite 167
Driving comfort CONTROLS
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Switching on
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
Display in the instrument
cluster lights up. The current
speed is adopted as the speed
limit.
Cruise control is active and maintains the
set speed.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched
on, if necessary.
Switching off
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
The displays go out. The stored desired
speed is deleted.
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button on
the steering wheel.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in
the following situations:
– When the driver applies the brakes.
– When selector lever position D is disen-
gaged.
– Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti-
vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control
is deactivated.
– If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter-
venes.
Setting the speed
Maintaining/storing the speed
Press or button in the interrupted
state.
When the system is switched on, the cur-
rent speed is maintained and stored as the
desired speed.
The stored speed is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched
on, if necessary.
The speed can also be stored as follows:
Press the button.
Changing the speed
or button: press until the desired
speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and
the vehicle reaches the stored speed when
the road is clear.
– or button: each time it is pressed
to the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
– or button: each time it is pressed
past the resistance point, the desired
speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/
10 km/h.
– or button: press button to resist-
ance point and hold. The vehicle acceler-
ates or decelerates without pressure on
the accelerator pedal. After the button is
released, the vehicle maintains its final
speed. Pressing the switch beyond the
resistance point causes the vehicle to
accelerate more rapidly.
Seite 168
CONTROLS Driving comfort
168
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Continuing cruise control
General information
An interrupted cruise control can be contin-
ued by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between cur-
rent speed and stored speed is not too large
before calling up the stored speed. Other-
wise, unintentional braking or accelerating
may occur.
Calling up the stored speed
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
The stored speed is reached again and main-
tained.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Indicator light
The indicator in the instru-
ment cluster lights up: the sys-
tem is switched on.
Desired speed and stored speed
The desired speed is displayed
together with the symbol.
– Display lights up green:
system is active, the dis-
play indicates the desired
speed.
– Display lights up gray: system is inter-
rupted, the display indicates the stored
speed.
– No display: system is switched off.
System limits
Engine power
The desired speed is also maintained down-
hill, but may not be maintained on uphill
grades if engine power is insufficient.
PDC Park Distance Control
Concept
PDC is a support when parking. The system
detects objects behind the vehicle. If the ve-
hicle is equipped with front PDC, objects in
front of the vehicle are detected too. Ob-
jects that you are approaching slowly are in-
dicated by signal tones and a visual display.
General information
The ultrasound sensors for measuring the
distances are located in the bumpers.
The delete range, depending on obstacles
and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given in the fol-
lowing situations:
– By the front middle sensors and the two
corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm
from the object.
– By the rear middle sensors at ap-
prox. 5 ft/1.50 m from the object.
– When a collision is imminent.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing the traffic conditions. There is a
risk of accident. Adjust driving style to
traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehi-
Seite 169
Driving comfort CONTROLS
169
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
cle surroundings closely and actively in-
tervene where appropriate.
Warning
Due to high speeds when PDC Park Dis-
tance Control is activated, the warning can
be delayed due to physical circumstances.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Avoid approaching an object
too fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDC
Park Distance Control is not yet active.
Overview
With front PDC: button in vehicle
Park assistance button
Ultrasound sensors
Ultrasound sensors of the
PDC, for instance in the bump-
ers.
Functional requirements
Ensure full functionality:
– Do not cover sensors, for instance with
stickers, bicycle racks or similar.
– Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system switches on automatically in the
following situations:
– If selector lever position R is engaged
while drive-ready state is switched on.
The rearview camera also switches on.
– With front PDC: when obstacles are de-
tected behind or in front of the vehicle
by PDC and the speed is slower than ap-
prox. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.
With front PDC: automatic activation on ob-
stacle detection can be switched off. Via the
Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Parking"
4. "Automatic PDC activation": depending
on the vehicle equipment.
5. "Automatic PDC activation"
The setting is stored for the driver pro-
file currently used.
Automatic deactivation during
forward travel
The system switches off when a certain
driving distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
With front PDC: switching on/off
manually
Press the park assistance button.
– On: the LED lights up.
– Off: the LED goes out.
The rearview camera image is displayed if
the reverse gear is engaged when pressing
the park assistance button.
Seite 170
CONTROLS Driving comfort
170
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Depending on the equipment version, the
system cannot be switched off manually if
the reverse gear is engaged.
Warning
Signal tones
An intermittent tone indicates when the ve-
hicle is approaching an object. E.g., when an
object is detected to the left rear of the ve-
hicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear
speaker.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals.
When the distance to a detected object is
less than approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a contin-
uous tone is sounded.
With front PDC: when objects are simulta-
neously located both in front of and behind
the vehicle, an alternating continuous sig-
nal is sounded.
Volume
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to
the entertainment volume can be adjusted.
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Tone"
4. "Volume settings"
5. "PDC"
6. Set the desired value.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object can
be shown on the Control Display. Objects
that are farther away are already displayed
on the Control Display before a signal
sounds.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance
Control (PDC) is activated.
The range of the sensors is represented in
colors: red, green and yellow.
When the image of the rearview camera is
displayed, the switch can be made to PDC:
"Rear view camera"
System limits
Safety information
Warning
The system is designed to operate in cer-
tain conditions and circumstances. Due to
conditions or other factors, the system
may not respond. There may be a risk of
accident or risk of damage to property. Ac-
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the
information in this Owner’s Manual re-
garding the scope of the system’s opera-
tion and limitations.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The detection of objects with ultrasonic
measurements can run into physical limits,
for instance under the following conditions:
– For small children and animals.
– For persons with certain clothing, for in-
stance coats.
– With external interference of the ultra-
sound, for instance from passing vehi-
cles or loud machines.
– When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam-
aged or out of position.
– If cargo protrudes.
– Under certain weather conditions such
as high relative humidity, wet condi-
tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong
wind.
Seite 171
Driving comfort CONTROLS
171
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
– With tow bars and trailer couplings of
other vehicles.
– With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
– With moving objects.
– With elevated, protruding objects such
as ledges or cargo.
– With objects with corners and sharp
edges.
– With objects with a fine surface struc-
ture such as fences.
– For objects with porous surfaces.
– Low objects already displayed, for in-
stance curbs, can move into the blind
area of the sensors before or after a con-
tinuous tone sounds.
False warnings
The system may issue a warning under the
following conditions even though there is
no obstacle within the detection range:
– In heavy rain.
– When sensors are very dirty or covered
with ice.
– When sensors are covered in snow.
– On rough road surfaces.
– On uneven surfaces, such as speed
bumps.
– In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, for instance in under-
ground garages.
– In automatic vehicle washes.
– Due to heavy exhaust.
– Due to other ultrasound sources, for in-
stance sweeping machines, high pres-
sure steam cleaners or neon lights.
The malfunction is signaled by a contin-
uous tone alternating between the front
and rear speakers. As soon as the mal-
function due to other ultrasound sources
is no longer present, the system is again
fully functional.
With front PDC: to reduce false alarms,
switch off automatic PDC activation on ob-
stacle detection, for instance in vehicle
washes; see Switching on/off.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Red symbol is displayed, and the
range of the sensors is dimmed on
the Control Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked by
a dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Rearview camera
Concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The
area behind the vehicle is shown on the
Control Display.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing the traffic conditions. There is a
risk of accident. Adjust driving style to
traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehi-
cle surroundings closely and actively in-
tervene where appropriate.
Seite 172
CONTROLS Driving comfort
172
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Overview
Depending on the vehicle equipment:
button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Camera
The camera lens is located in the handle of
the tailgate.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
If necessary, clean the camera lens.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically switched on if
selector lever position R is engaged when
the drive-ready state is switched on.
Automatic deactivation during
forward travel
The system switches off when a certain
driving distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Depending on the vehicle equipment:
switching on/off manually
Press the park assistance button.
– On: the LED lights up.
– Off: the LED goes out.
The parking assistance functions are shown
on the Control Display.
Switching the view via the Central
Information Display (CID)
If the rearview camera view is not dis-
played, change the view via the Central In-
formation Display (CID):
"Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Display on the Control Display
Functional requirements
– The rearview camera is switched on.
– The tailgate is fully closed.
– Keep the recording range of the camera
clear.
Protruding cargo or carrier systems that
are not connected to a trailer power
socket can lead to malfunctions.
Activating assistance functions
More than one assistance function can be
active at the same time.
– Parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Lanes and turning radius lines are indi-
cated.
– Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
Seite 173
Driving comfort CONTROLS
173
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Obstacles are marked, depending on the
vehicle equipment.
Pathway lines
Pathway lines can be superimposed on the
image of the rearview camera.
Pathway lines help you to estimate the
space required when parking and maneu-
vering on level roads.
Pathway lines depend on the current steer-
ing angle and are continuously adjusted to
the steering wheel movements.
Turning radius lines
Turning radius lines can be superimposed
on the image of the rearview camera.
Turning radius lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level
road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed af-
ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer-
tain angle.
Obstacle marking
Depending on the vehicle equipment, obsta-
cle markings can be faded into the image of
the rearview camera.
The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark-
ings match the markings of the PDC Park
Distance Control.
Parking using pathway and turning
radius lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning
radius lines lead to within the limits of
the parking space.
Seite 174
CONTROLS Driving comfort
174
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point
where the pathway line covers the cor-
responding turning radius line.
Display settings
Brightness
With the rearview camera switched on:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired set-
ting is reached and press the Controller.
Contrast
With the rearview camera switched on:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired set-
ting is reached and press the Controller.
System limits
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles or high, protruding ob-
jects such as ledges may not be recognized
by the system.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, some
assistance functions also consider data from
the PDC Park Distance Control.
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance
Control chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Dis-
play may be closer than they appear. There-
fore, do not estimate the distance from the
objects on the display.
Parking assistant
Concept
This system assists the driver in parking
parallel to the road.
General information
Parking assistant handling is divided into
three steps:
– Switching on and activating.
– Parking space search.
– Parking.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces
on both sides of the vehicle.
The parking assistant calculates the best
possible parking line and takes control of
steering during the parking procedure.
System status and instructions on required
actions are displayed on the Control Dis-
play.
A component of the parking assistant is the
PDC Park Distance Control.
Seite 175
Driving comfort CONTROLS
175
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing the traffic conditions. Based on
the limits of the system, it cannot inde-
pendently react to all traffic situations.
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where ap-
propriate.
NOTICE
The parking assistant can steer the vehicle
over or onto curbs. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Watch traffic closely and
actively intervene where appropriate.
The safety information of the PDC Park Dis-
tance Control applies in addition.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Park assistance button
Ultrasound sensors
The ultrasound sensors for measuring park-
ing spaces are located on the wheel hous-
ing.
Functional requirements
Ultrasound sensors
Ensure full functionality:
– Do not cover sensors, for instance with
stickers.
– Keep the sensors clean and unob-
structed.
For measuring parking spaces
– Maximum speed while driving forward
approx. 22 mph/35 km/h.
– Maximum distance to row of parked ve-
hicles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space
– Gaps behind an object that has a min.
length of 5 ft/1.5 m.
– Gap between two objects with a mini-
mum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
– Min. length of gap between two objects:
your vehicle's length plus approx.
3.3 ft/1.0 m.
– Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
For parking
– Doors and tailgate are closed.
Seite 176
CONTROLS Driving comfort
176
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
– The parking brake is released.
– When parking in parking spaces on the
driver's side, the corresponding turn sig-
nal must be switched on.
Switching on and activating
Switching on with the button
Press the park assistance button.
The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space
search is indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automati-
cally.
Switching on with reverse gear
Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space
search is indicated on the Control Display.
To activate: "Parking Assistant"
Display on the Control Display
System activated/deactivated
Symbol Meaning
Gray: the system is not availa-
ble.
White: the system is available
but not activated.
The system is activated.
Parking space search and system
status
– Symbol P on the vehicle image: the park-
ing assistant is activated and the park-
ing space search is active.
– Control Display shows suitable parking
spaces at the edge of the road next to
the vehicle symbol. When the parking
assistant is active, suitable parking
spaces are highlighted.
– The parking procedure is
active. The system takes
over the steering.
– Parking space search is always active
whenever the vehicle is moving forward
slow and straight, even if the system is
deactivated. When the system is deacti-
vated, the displays on the Control Dis-
play are shown in gray.
Parking using the parking assistant
Parking
1. Press the park assistance button or
shift into reverse gear to switch on the
parking assistant, refer to page 177. Ac-
tivate the parking assistant, if needed.
Parking assistant is activated.
2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a
speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h
Seite 177
Driving comfort CONTROLS
177
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
and at a distance of maximum
5 ft/1.5 m.
The status of the parking space search
and possible parking spaces are dis-
played on the display, refer to page 177.
3. Follow the instructions on the display.
The best possible parking position will
come after gear change on the station-
ary vehicle - wait for the automatic
steering wheel move.
The end of the parking procedure is in-
dicated on the display.
4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
needed.
Interrupting manually
The parking assistant can be interrupted at
any time:
– Press the park assistance button.
– "Parking Assistant"
Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in
the following situations:
– If the driver grasps the steering wheel
or takes over steering.
– If a gear is selected that does not match
the instruction on the display.
– If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
6 mph/10 km/h.
– Possibly on snow-covered or slippery
road surfaces.
– If a maximum number of parking at-
tempts or the time taken for parking is
exceeded.
– If the PDC Park Distance Control dis-
plays clearances that are too small.
– When switching into other functions of
the radio.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Resuming
An interrupted parking procedure can be
continued, if needed.
Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to
page 177, and follow the instructions on the
display.
Switching off
The system can be switched off as follows:
– Press the park assistance button.
System limits
Safety information
Warning
The system is designed to operate in cer-
tain conditions and circumstances. Due to
conditions or other factors, the system
may not respond. There may be a risk of
accident or risk of damage to property. Ac-
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the
information in this Owner’s Manual re-
garding the scope of the system’s opera-
tion and limitations.
No parking assistance
The parking assistant does not offer assis-
tance in the following situations:
– In tight curves.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in
the following situations:
– On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
– On slippery ground.
– With accumulations of leaves/snow in
the parking space.
Seite 178
CONTROLS Driving comfort
178
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
– With a mounted emergency wheel.
– With ditches or edges, for instance an
edge of a port.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The detection of objects with ultrasonic
measurements can run into physical limits,
for instance under the following conditions:
– For small children and animals.
– For persons with certain clothing, for in-
stance coats.
– With external interference of the ultra-
sound, for instance from passing vehi-
cles or loud machines.
– When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam-
aged or out of position.
– If cargo protrudes.
– Under certain weather conditions such
as high relative humidity, wet condi-
tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong
wind.
– With tow bars and trailer couplings of
other vehicles.
– With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
– With moving objects.
– With elevated, protruding objects such
as ledges or cargo.
– With objects with corners and sharp
edges.
– With objects with a fine surface struc-
ture such as fences.
– For objects with porous surfaces.
– Low objects already displayed, for in-
stance curbs, can move into the blind
area of the sensors before or after a con-
tinuous tone sounds.
– The parking assistant may identify park-
ing spaces that are not suitable for park-
ing.
Tire size
The parking position may vary depending
on the tire size.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking assistant failed. Have the sys-
tem checked by a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Seite 179
Driving comfort CONTROLS
179
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Climate control
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and
functions that are not necessarily available
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Interior air quality
The air quality in the vehicle is improved by
the following components:
– Emission tested passenger compart-
ment.
– Microfilter.
– Air conditioning system to control the
temperature, air flow and recirculated-
air mode.
Depending on the equipment specification:
– Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.
– Automatic climate control.
– Stationary climate control.
Seite 180
CONTROLS Climate control
180
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Automatic climate control
1 Temperature, left
2 Display
3 Air flow, AUTO intensity
4 AUTO program
5 Air distribution, manual
6 Display
7 Temperature, right
8 Seat heating, right 87
9 Maximum cooling
10 Air conditioning
11 Recirculated-air mode
12 Rear window defroster
13 To defrost windows and remove conden-
sation
14 Seat heating, left 87
Climate control functions in detail
Switching the system on/off
Switching on
Set any air flow.
Switching off
Turn wheel for air flow to the
left until the control switches
off.
Temperature
Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the
set temperature as quickly as possible, if
Seite 181
Climate control CONTROLS
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
necessary by using the maximum cooling or
heating power, and then keeps it constant.
Adjusting
Turn the wheel to set the de-
sired temperature.
Do not rapidly switch between different
temperature settings. The automatic climate
control will not have sufficient time to ad-
just the set temperature.
Air conditioning
Concept
The air in the car's interior will be cooled
and dehumidified and, depending on the
temperature setting, warmed again.
The car's interior can be cooled with acti-
vated drive-ready or standby state.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with air con-
ditioning switched on.
Depending on the weather, the windshield
may fog up briefly when drive-ready state is
switched on.
The cooling function is switched on auto-
matically with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water, refer to page 210, de-
velops and drains underneath the vehicle.
This is normal.
Maximum cooling
Concept
The system is set to the lowest temperature,
maximum air flow and recirculated-air
mode.
General information
The function is available with external tem-
peratures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with
the drive-ready state switched on.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body
region. The vents need to be open for this.
The air flow can be adjusted with the pro-
gram active.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with the
system switched on.
AUTO program
Concept
The AUTO program cools, ventilates or
heats the car's interior automatically.
The air distribution and temperature are
controlled automatically depending on the
temperature in the car's interior and the de-
sired temperature setting including the se-
lected intensity of the air flow.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with the
AUTO program switched on.
Depending on the selected temperature,
AUTO intensity and outside influences, the
air is directed to the windshield, side win-
dows, upper body, and into the floor area.
Seite 182
CONTROLS Climate control
182
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Point the side vents toward the side win-
dows.
The following features are switched on au-
tomatically with the AUTO program:
– The air conditioning, refer to page 182.
To switch off the program: press the button
again or manually adjust the air distribu-
tion.
Intensity
With the AUTO program activated, the au-
tomatic intensity control can be changed.
Turn the ring to set the de-
sired intensity from soft to in-
tensive.
The set intensity is displayed via the posi-
tion of the illuminated LED segment.
Recirculated-air mode
Concept
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-
tants in the immediate environment by tem-
porarily suspending the supply of outside
air. The system then recirculates the air
flow within the vehicle.
Operation
Press the button:
The LED is illuminated when recir-
culated-air mode is switched on. The supply
of outside air is shut off.
When recirculated-air mode is switched off,
fresh air is directed into the vehicle's inte-
rior.
To prevent window condensation, recircu-
lated-air mode switches off automatically af-
ter a certain amount of time, depending on
the external temperature.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and
window fogging increases.
If the windows fog over, switch off recircu-
lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if
needed.
Adjusting the air flow manually
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be ad-
justed manually.
General information
To adjust the air flow manually switch off
AUTO program first.
Operation
Turn the ring to set the de-
sired air flow.
The manually adjusted air flow is displayed
via illuminated LED segments.
The air flow of the automatic climate con-
trol may be reduced automatically to save
battery power.
Adjusting the air distribution
manually
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can
be adjusted manually.
Operation
Press the button repeatedly to se-
lect a program:
– Windows, upper body region, and floor
area.
– Upper body region and floor area.
Seite 183
Climate control CONTROLS
183
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
– Floor area.
– Windows and floor area.
– Windows.
– Windows and upper body region.
– Upper body region.
To defrost windows and remove
condensation
Concept
Ice and condensation are quickly removed
from the windshield and the front side win-
dows.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with the
system switched on.
The air flow can be adjusted with the pro-
gram active.
If there is window condensation, switch on
the air conditioning too.
Rear window defroster
Press the button. The LED lights up.
The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of
time.
When GREEN Mode is activated, the heat-
ing output is reduced.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
In external and recirculated-air mode, the
microfilter/activated charcoal filter filters
dust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of
the air.
Have this filter changed during vehicle
maintenance, refer to page 248.
Ventilation
Setting
The air flow directions can be individually
adjusted:
– Direct ventilation:
The air flow is directly pointed onto the
person. The air flow heats or cools no-
ticeably, depending on the adjusted tem-
perature.
– Indirect ventilation:
If the vents are fully or partly closed, the
air is directly routed into the car's inte-
rior.
Front ventilation
– Turn knob for continuous opening and
closing of the vents.
– Swivel the vents to alter the direction of
the vent flow, arrows.
Stationary climate control
Concept
Stationary climate control cools or heats the
car's interior prior to departure to a com-
fortable temperature.
The system automatically cools, vents, or
heats depending on the internal and exter-
nal temperature. Snow and ice may be re-
moved more easily.
Seite 184
CONTROLS Climate control
184
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
General information
The stationary climate control can be
switched on and off directly or via a preset
departure time:
– Direct operation, refer to page 185.
– Preselected departure times, refer to
page 185.
The air automatically exits through the
vents to the windshield, the side windows,
the upper body region and into the floor
area.
The system switches off automatically after
a certain period of time.
If stationary climate control is used during
the charging process, less air conditioning
capacity will be required while driving. This
optimizes the range.
Functional requirements
– Drive-ready state deactivated.
– High-voltage battery sufficiently
charged or charging cable connected.
If the high-voltage battery is heavily dis-
charged, it can take some time after con-
necting the charging cable, until the sta-
tionary climate control will be
functional.
– Direct operation or departure time pre-
selected: depends on internal, external,
and set desired temperature.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and
time are set correctly.
– To ensure the minimum range of the ve-
hicle, the stationary climate control may
be automatically switched off, for in-
stance after repeated activation or due
to an insufficient state of charge of the
high-voltage battery. After the station-
ary climate control is switched off due
to an insufficient state of charge, charge
the high-voltage battery and switch the
drive-ready state on and off. The station-
ary climate control is available again.
– The vents are open to allow air to flow
out.
Switching on/off directly
Concept
The system can be switched on or off di-
rectly.
The system switches off automatically after
a certain period of time.
Via the Central Information Display
(CID)
The system can be switched on or off via
the Central Information Display (CID).
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Activate comfort climate"
5. "Activate now"
Climate control for departure time
Concept
Different departure times can be set to en-
sure a comfortable interior temperature in
the vehicle at the time of departure.
The activation time is automatically deter-
mined based on the temperature.
The system promptly switches on before the
selected departure time.
The departure time is preselected in two
steps:
– Set departure times.
– Activate departure times.
Seite 185
Climate control CONTROLS
185
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Setting the departure time
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Activate comfort climate"
5. "Plan comfort climate"
6. Set the desired departure time, refer to
page 225.
Activating the departure time
If a departure time is to influence the
switching on of the stationary climate con-
trol, the respective departure time must be
activated first.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Activate comfort climate"
5. "Plan comfort climate"
6. "Precondition for departure"
7. Activate the desired departure time.
The symbol on the automatic climate
control lights up when the departure time is
activated.
The symbol on the automatic climate
control flashes when the stationary climate
control has been switched on.
Seite 186
CONTROLS Climate control
186
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and
functions that are not necessarily available
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Integrated Universal Remote
Control
Concept
The integrated Universal Remote Control in
the interior mirror can operate up to 3 func-
tions of remote-controlled systems such as
garage door drives, barriers, or lighting sys-
tems.
General information
The Integrated Universal Remote Control
replaces up to 3 different hand-held trans-
mitters. To operate the remote control, the
buttons on the interior mirror must be pro-
grammed with the desired functions. The
hand-held transmitter for the particular sys-
tem is required in order to program the re-
mote control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
If possible, do not install the antenna of the
remote-controlled system, e.g. the garage
door drive, near metal objects to ensure the
best possible operation.
Safety information
Warning
The operation of remote-controlled sys-
tems with the integrated universal remote
control, such as the garage door, may re-
sult in injury, for example, body parts be-
coming jammed in a garage door. There is
a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Make sure that the area of movement
of the respective system is clear during
programming and operation. Also follow
the safety information of the hand-held
transmitter.
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the pack-
aging or in the owner's manual of the
system to be controlled, the system
is generally compatible with the integrated
Universal Remote Control.
Additional questions are answered by:
– A dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
– www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gen-
tex Corporation.
Seite 187
Interior equipment CONTROLS
187
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Overview
1 LED
2 Programmable keys
3 Hand-held transmitters of the system
Programming
General information
The battery of the hand-held transmitter
must be fully charged at the time of pro-
gramming to ensure an optimal range of the
integrated universal remote control.
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial setup:
Press and hold the two outer buttons on
the interior mirror simultaneously for
approximately 10 seconds until the LED
flashes green rapidly. This erases all pro-
gramming of the buttons on the interior
mirror.
3. Press the interior mirror button to be
programmed. The LED on the interior
mirror will slowly begin flashing orange.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the
system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5
to 30 cm away from the buttons on the
interior mirror. The required distance
depends on the hand-held transmitter.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired
function on the hand-held transmitter.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and re-
peatedly press and release the hand-held
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
6.
– The LED lights up green: program-
ming completed.
Release the button.
– The LED flashes fast: programming
is not complete.
Press the button on the interior mir-
ror for 2 seconds and release. Per-
form this procedure three times to
complete the programming proce-
dure.
If the integrated universal remote
control remains nonoperational, con-
tinue with the special features for
change code wireless systems.
– LED does not flash green after
60 seconds: programming not com-
pleted.
Repeat steps 3 to 6.
To program other functions on other but-
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
Special feature of the rolling code
wireless system
If you are unable to operate the system af-
ter repeated programming, please check if
the system to be controlled features a roll-
ing code radio system.
Refer to the owner's manual for the system.
For systems with a rolling code radio sys-
tem, the integrated Universal Remote Con-
trol and the system also have to be
synchronized.
Please read the owner's manual to find out
how to synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a
second person.
Seite 188
CONTROLS Interior equipment
188
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Synchronizing the universal remote control
with the system:
1. Park the vehicle within range of the re-
mote-controlled system.
2. Program the relevant button on the inte-
rior mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing but-
ton on the system being programmed,
e.g. at the garage gate. You have approx.
30 seconds for the next step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on
the interior mirror for approximately
3 seconds and then release it. If neces-
sary, repeat this step up to three times
in order to finish synchronization. Once
synchronization is complete, the pro-
grammed function will be carried out.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press and hold the interior mirror but-
ton to be programmed.
3. As soon as the LED on the interior mir-
ror flashes orange after approx. 20 sec-
onds, release the button.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the
system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5
to 30 cm away from the buttons on the
interior mirror. The required distance
depends on the hand-held transmitter.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired
function on the hand-held transmitter.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and re-
peatedly press and release the hand-held
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
6. The LED can light up in different ways.
– The LED lights up green: the pro-
gramming procedure is completed.
Release the button.
– The LED flashes fast: the hand-held
transmitter was detected but pro-
gramming is not complete.
Press the button on the interior mir-
ror for 2 seconds and release. Per-
form this procedure three times to
complete the programming proce-
dure.
If the integrated universal remote
control remains nonoperational, con-
tinue with the special features for
change code wireless systems.
– LED does not flash green after
60 seconds: programming not com-
pleted.
Repeat steps 3 to 6.
If the programming procedure is not com-
pleted, the previous programming will re-
main unchanged.
Operation
Warning
The operation of remote-controlled sys-
tems with the integrated universal remote
control, such as the garage door, may re-
sult in injury, for example, body parts be-
coming jammed in a garage door. There is
a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Make sure that the area of movement
of the respective system is clear during
programming and operation. Also follow
the safety information of the hand-held
transmitter.
The system, such as the garage door, can be
operated using the button on the interior
mirror while the engine is running or when
the ignition is started. To do this, hold down
the button within receiving range of the
system until the function is activated. The
interior mirror LED stays lit while the wire-
less signal is being transmitted.
Seite 189
Interior equipment CONTROLS
189
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Deleting stored functions
All stored functions will be deleted. The
functions cannot be deleted individually.
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi-
mately 10 seconds until the LED on the in-
terior mirror flashes green rapidly.
Digital compass
Overview
1 Control button
2 Mirror display
Mirror display
The compass shows the current driving di-
rection.
Operating concept
Various functions can be called up by press-
ing the control button with a pointed object,
such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar
object. The following setting options are
displayed in succession, depending on how
long the control button is pressed:
– Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
– 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
– 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
– 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
setting.
– 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
Setting the compass zones
Sets the particular compass zones on the ve-
hicle so that the compass operates correctly;
refer to World map with compass zones.
Seite 190
CONTROLS Interior equipment
190
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for ap-
prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the
set compass zone appears in the mirror.
2. To change the zone setting, press the
control button quickly and repeatedly
until the number of the compass zone
that corresponds with your location ap-
pears in the mirror.
The set zone is stored automatically. The
compass is ready for use again after approx-
imately 10 seconds.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in
the event of the following:
– The wrong compass point is displayed.
– The point of the compass displayed does
not change despite changing the direc-
tion of travel.
– Not all points of the compass are dis-
played.
Procedure
1. Make sure that there are no large metal-
lic objects or overhead power lines near
the vehicle and that there is sufficient
room to drive around in a circle.
2. Set the currently applicable compass
zone.
3. Press and hold the control button for ap-
prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears
on the display. Next, drive in a complete
circle at least once at a speed of no more
than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc-
cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points
of the compass.
Left/right-hand steering
The digital compass is already set for right
or left-hand steering at the factory.
Setting the language
Press and hold the control button for ap-
prox. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the
Seite 191
Interior equipment CONTROLS
191
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
control button again to switch between
English "E" and German "O".
Settings are stored automatically after ap-
proximately 10 seconds.
Sun visor
Glare shield
To provide protection against glare, fold the
sun visor down or pivot it to the side.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor
behind a cover.
When the cover is opened, the mirror light-
ing switches on.
Front passenger side dash-
board
Decorative trim
Customized decorative trim panels for the
dashboard on the front passenger side are
available as original MINI accessories de-
pending on the equipment specification.
Follow the assembly instructions.
Ashtray/cigarette lighter
Overview
The ashtray is located in one of the frontal
cup holders, the cigarette lighter above it in
the center console.
Ashtray
In order to empty the ashtray, remove the
ashtray from the cup holder.
Cigarette lighter
Safety information
Warning
Contact with the hot heating element or
the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can
cause burns. Flammable materials can ig-
nite if the cigarette lighter falls down or is
held against the objects. There is a risk of
fire and injuries. There is a risk of damage
to property. Take hold of the cigarette
lighter by its handle. Make sure that chil-
dren do not use the cigarette lighter.
Seite 192
CONTROLS Interior equipment
192
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
damage to property. Replace the cigarette
lighter or socket cover again after using
the socket.
Operation
Push in the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter can be
removed as soon as it pops
back out.
Sockets
Concept
The lighter socket can be used as a socket
for electrical equipment when standby and
drive-ready state are switched on.
General information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using non-
compatible connectors.
Safety information
Warning
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of
the airbags, such as portable navigation
devices, can hinder the unfolding of the
airbag or be thrown around in the car's in-
terior during unfolding. There is a risk of
injury. Make sure that devices and cables
are not in the airbag's area of unfolding.
NOTICE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board
network can be overloaded or damaged.
There is a risk of damage to property. Only
connect battery chargers for the vehicle
battery to the starting aid terminals in the
engine compartment.
NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
damage to property. Replace the cigarette
lighter or socket cover again after using
the socket.
In the center console
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
Seite 193
Interior equipment CONTROLS
193
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
In the cargo area
The socket is located on the right side in
the cargo area.
USB port
General information
Follow the information regarding the con-
nection of mobile devices to the USB port in
the section on USB connections, refer to
page 55.
In the center console
Depending on the equipment version, a USB
port Type A or a USB port Type A and a USB
port Type C are located in the front of the
center console.
Properties of upper USB port:
– USB port Type A.
– For charging mobile devices and for
data transfer.
– Charge current: max. 1.5 A.
Properties of lower USB port:
– USB port Type C.
– For charging mobile devices and for
data transfer.
– Charge current: max. 3 A.
Wireless charging tray
Concept
The wireless charging tray enables the fol-
lowing functions to be performed without
cables:
– Charging the rechargeable battery of a
mobile phone with Qi capability and of
other mobile devices, which support the
Qi standard.
– Connect the mobile phone to the exter-
nal antenna.
Depending on the country, this provides
for better network reception and a con-
sistent reproduction quality.
General information
When inserting the mobile phone, make
sure there are no objects between it and the
wireless charging tray.
During charging, the surface of the tray and
the mobile phone may become warm.
Higher temperatures may lead to a reduc-
tion in the charge current through the mo-
bile phone, and in isolated cases the charg-
ing process is paused temporarily. Follow
the relevant instructions in the mobile
phone owner's manual.
NOTE
This device has been tested for human ex-
posure limits and found compliant at a mini-
mum distance of 4 in/10 cm during opera-
tion.
Seite 194
CONTROLS Interior equipment
194
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Therefore, a distance of 4 in/10 cm must be
maintained in every direction when operat-
ing the device.
Mounting position of the product.
Safety information
Warning
When charging a device that meets the Qi
standard in the wireless charging tray, any
metal objects located between the device
and the tray can become very hot. Placing
storage devices or electronic cards, such
as chip cards, cards with magnetic strips
or cards for signal transmission, between
the device and the tray may impair the
card function. There is a risk of injury and
risk of damage to property. When charg-
ing mobile devices, make sure there are no
objects between the device and the tray.
NOTICE
The tray is intended for mobile phones up
to a particular size. Forceful inserting of
the mobile phone into the tray can damage
the tray or the mobile phone. There is a
risk of damage to property. Observe the
maximum dimensions for mobile phones.
Do not force the mobile phone into the
tray.
Functional requirements
– Ignition or standby state is switched on.
– The mobile phone must compatibly sup-
port the required Qi standard. Compati-
ble mobile phones, refer to page 53.
If the mobile phone does not support the
Qi standard, the mobile phone can be
charged using a special Qi-compatible
charging case.
– Use only protective jackets and covers
up to a maximum thickness of
0.07 in/2 mm. Otherwise, the charging
function may be impaired.
– The mobile phone must not exceed the
maximum size of approximately 5.9 x
3.07 x 0.62 in/150 x 78 x 16 mm.
Overview
The wireless charging tray is located in the
center armrest.
1 Front holder with LED
2 Storage area
3 Movable clamp
Inserting the mobile phone
1. Open center armrest, refer to vehicle
Owner's Manual.
2. Push back the clamp.
Seite 195
Interior equipment CONTROLS
195
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
3. Insert the mobile phone with the display
facing upward in the direction of the
front holder, arrow 1.
4. Place the mobile phone in the storage
area, arrow 2.
5. Push the clamp forward and clamp the
mobile phone in the tray.
6. Close the center armrest.
Removing the mobile phone
1. Open the center armrest.
2. Push the clamp back and remove the
mobile phone.
LED displays
Color Meaning
Blue The mobile phone is charging.
Depending on the model, the
blue LED is no longer illuminated
once the inserted mobile phone
with Qi capability is fully
charged.
Or-
ange
The mobile phone is not charg-
ing.
Temperature on the mobile
phone possibly too high or for-
eign object in the charging tray.
Red The mobile phone is not charg-
ing.
Contact a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
System limits
At high temperatures on the mobile phone
or in the vehicle, the charging functions of
the mobile phone may be limited and some
functions may no longer work.
LTE-Compensator - Information
and User Manual
Your car is equipped with a wireless charg-
ing tray (WCA) to charge your mobile phone
and connect it to the mobile network. To en-
sure the best possible connection a signal
booster (LTE-Compensator) is used in con-
junction with the WCA. The following para-
graphs refer to this booster:
This is a CONSUMER device.
BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS
DEVICE with your wireless provider and
have your provider's consent. Most wireless
providers consent to the use of Compensa-
tors. Some providers may not consent to the
use of this device on their network. If you
Seite 196
CONTROLS Interior equipment
196
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
are unsure, contact your provider. You
MUST operate this device with approved an-
tennas and cables as specified by the manu-
facturer. Antennas MUST be installed at
least 20 cm (8 inches) from any person. You
MUST cease operating this device immedi-
ately if requested by the FCC or a licensed
wireless service provider. Warning E911 lo-
cation information may not be provided or
may be inaccurate for calls served by using
this device.
Please observe additionally the following in-
formation
– Sprint Nextel will allow consumers to
register their signal boosters by calling
their toll-free number.
– T-Mobile online registration link:
(www.T-Mobile.com/BoosterRegistra-
tion); (https://saqat.t-mobile.com/sites/
SignalBooster#).
– Verizon’s online registration link:
(http://www.verizonwireless.com/
wcms/consumer/register-signal-boos-
ter.html).
– AT&T online registration link (https://
securec45.securewebsession.com/
attsignalbooster.com/).
– U.S.Cellular online registration link
(http://www.uscellular.com/uscellular/
support/fcc-booster-registration.jsp).
Before use you must register your booster
device with your wireless provider.
If you should be requested by the FCC to
cease operating your booster, you are not
allowed to insert your mobile phone in the
charging tray anymore unless the booster is
permanently deactivated by your local MINI
dealer.
You must not remove the booster from the
car nor use it with any other than the prein-
stalled coupling device or antenna. Any
modification of the existing antenna or cou-
pling device as well as the use of other an-
tennas or coupling devices will cause the
cease of the booster´s operating license.
The booster device fulfills the network pro-
tection standards as required by the FCC,
such as intermodulation limits, oscillation
detection and gain limits.
Booster Manufacturer: Kathrein Automotive
Model Number: LTECOMPB0
Part Number: 6803145-01
FCC-ID: 2ACC7LTECOMPB0
Seite 197
Interior equipment CONTROLS
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and
functions that are not necessarily available
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Safety information
Warning
Loose objects or devices with a cable con-
nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile
phones, can be thrown about the car's in-
terior while driving, for instance in the
event of an accident, braking or evasive
maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure
loose objects or devices with a cable con-
nection to the vehicle in the car's interior.
NOTICE
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. There is a risk of
damage to property. Do not use anti-slip
pads.
Overview
The following storage compartments are
available in the car's interior:
– Glove compartment on the front passen-
ger side.
– Compartments in the doors.
– Storage compartment in the center arm-
rest.
– Storage compartment in front of the cup
holders.
– Clothes hooks
– Storage tray in the center console.
– Pockets on the backrests of the front
seats.
Glove compartment
Safety information
Warning
Folded open, the glove compartment pro-
trudes in the car's interior. Objects in the
glove compartment can be thrown into the
car's interior while driving, for instance in
the event of an accident, braking or eva-
sive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury.
Always close the glove compartment im-
mediately after using it.
Seite 198
CONTROLS Storage compartments
198
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment
switches on.
Closing
Fold up the cover.
Compartments in the doors
General information
There are storage compartments in the
doors.
Safety information
Warning
Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or
glasses, can break in the event of an acci-
dent or a braking or evasive maneuver.
Broken glass can be scattered in the car's
interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Do not use any break-
able objects while driving. Only stow
breakable objects in closed storage com-
partments.
Center armrest
General information
The center armrest contains a storage com-
partment.
Opening
Press button, arrow 1, and open center arm-
rest upward, arrow 2.
Adjusting the height
Press button, arrow 1, and swing center
armrest upward or downward into the de-
sired height, arrow 2.
Seite 199
Storage compartments CONTROLS
199
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Cup holders
Safety information
Warning
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders
may damage the cup holders or be thrown
about the car’s interior in the event of an
accident, an evasive maneuver, or forceful
braking. Spilled liquids can distract from
the traffic conditions and lead to an acci-
dent. Hot drinks can damage the cup
holder or lead to scalding. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not force objects into the cup holder. Use
lightweight, shatterproof, and sealable
containers. Do not transport hot bever-
ages.
Front
In the center console.
Rear
In front of the back seats and in the side
armrests.
Clothes hooks
General information
The clothes hooks are located above the
side windows in the rear.
Safety information
Warning
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can
obstruct the view while driving. There is a
risk of accident. When suspending cloth-
ing articles from the clothes hooks, ensure
that they will not obstruct the driver's
view.
Warning
Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead
to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
risk of injury and risk of damage to prop-
erty. Only hang lightweight objects, for in-
stance clothing articles, from the clothes
hooks.
Seite 200
CONTROLS Storage compartments
200
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Cargo area
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and
functions that are not necessarily available
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Loading
Safety information
Warning
High gross weight can overheat the tires,
damage them internally and cause a sud-
den drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving
characteristics may be negatively im-
pacted, reducing lane stability, lengthen-
ing the braking distances and changing
the steering response. There is a risk of
accident. Pay attention to the permitted
load capacity of the tires and never exceed
the permitted gross weight.
Warning
Loose objects or devices with a cable con-
nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile
phones, can be thrown about the car's in-
terior while driving, for instance in the
event of an accident, braking or evasive
maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure
loose objects or devices with a cable con-
nection to the vehicle in the car's interior.
Warning
Improperly stowed objects can shift and
be thrown into the car's interior, for in-
stance in the event of an accident or dur-
ing braking and evasive maneuver. Vehi-
cle occupants can be hit and injured. There
is a risk of injury. Stow and secure objects
and cargo properly.
NOTICE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.
There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo
area.
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on
your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca-
pacity. For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs and there will
be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehi-
cle, the amount of available cargo and
Seite 201
Cargo area CONTROLS
201
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 -
750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs)
5. Determine the combined weight of lug-
gage and cargo being loaded on the ve-
hicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load ca-
pacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the availa-
ble cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
Load
The maximum load is the sum of the weight
of the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants,
the less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo
– Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
– Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as pos-
sible, directly behind and at the bottom
of the rear passenger seat backrests.
– Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is
not occupied, secure each of the outer
safety belts in the opposite buckle.
– If necessary, fold down the rear back-
rests to stow large cargo.
– Do not stack cargo above the top edge of
the backrests.
– Small and light cargo: secure with
ratchet straps or draw straps.
– Larger and heavy cargo: secure with
cargo straps.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
Without storage compartment package: to
secure the cargo there are two lashing eyes,
arrow 1, in the cargo area.
With storage compartment package: to se-
cure the cargo there are six lashing eyes, ar-
rows 1 and 2, in the cargo area.
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing
straps, tensioning straps, draw straps or
cargo nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo
area.
Cargo cover
General information
When the tailgate is opened, the cargo
cover is raised.
Seite 202
CONTROLS Cargo area
202
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Safety information
Warning
Loose objects or devices with a cable con-
nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile
phones, can be thrown about the car's in-
terior while driving, for instance in the
event of an accident, braking or evasive
maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure
loose objects or devices with a cable con-
nection to the vehicle in the car's interior.
Removing
For storing bulky objects the cargo cover
can be removed.
1. Detach the left and right retaining
straps at the tailgate.
2. Pull the cargo cover out of the brackets
on the left and right.
Installing
1. Slide the cargo cover forward horizon-
tally into the two side brackets until it
audibly engages.
2. Attach the left and right retaining straps
at the tailgate.
Storage space under cargo
floor panel
Located under the cargo floor panel on the
right side is a trough for the onboard vehi-
cle tool kit.
Fold the right side of the cargo floor panel
upward to remove the onboard vehicle tool
kit.
Enlarging the cargo area
Concept
The cargo area can be enlarged as follows:
– The rear seat backrests can be folded
down.
– The rear seat backrests can be moved
into an upright loading position using
the cargo setting.
General information
The rear seat backrest is divided into two
parts at a ratio of 60 to 40. The left rear seat
backrest is connected to the center section.
The rear seat backrests can be folded down
from the rear.
Seite 203
Cargo area CONTROLS
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Safety information
Warning
Danger of jamming with folding down the
backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
area of movement of the rear backrest and
the of the head restraint is clear prior to
folding down.
Warning
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-
cured cargo can be thrown about the car’s
interior; for instance, in the event of an ac-
cident, braking or an evasive maneuver.
There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the rear seat backrest is locked after fold-
ing it back.
Warning
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect
seat adjustment or improper installation of
the child seat. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that the child re-
straint system fits securely against the
backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest
tilt for all affected backrests and correctly
adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and
backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head
restraints or remove them.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is
clear when moving the head restraint.
Folding down the rear seat
backrest from the rear
1. Before the rear seat backrest is folded
down, hook the corresponding safety
belt into the belt buckle on the side.
2. Pull the lever up, arrow 1, and fold the
rear seat backrest forward, arrow 2.
Cargo position
Concept
The rear seat backrests can be moved into
an upright loading position.
Adjusting
1. Release the backrest, and tilt it forward.
2. Fold the frame up until it engages.
3. Fold back and engage the rear seat
backrest.
Folding back the backrest
Fold up the backrest and press it into the
latch. Make sure that the safety belt is not
Seite 204
CONTROLS Cargo area
204
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
caught behind the backrest or in between
the backrest and the rear seats.
The red marking on the lever disappears
completely.
Variable cargo area floor
Concept
With the variable cargo area floor, the cargo
area can be configured corresponding to
transport requirements.
General information
Follow instructions on securing cargo, refer
to page 201.
Removing the cargo floor panel
Grasp the cargo floor panel in the rear and
fold slightly upward. Next, pull it backward
from the supports.
The cargo floor panel can be removed from
the cargo area above the tail lights.
Lower position
– Larger objects can be transported.
– Space for smaller objects remains be-
tween the fixed and variable cargo area
floor.
Folded up position
Safety information
Warning
Improper use of the variable cargo floor
panel can lead to a danger of objects flying
about during braking and evasive maneu-
vers. There is a risk of injury and risk of
damage to property.
– Do not use the variable cargo floor
panel to separate the cargo area and
car's interior in the sense of a parti-
tion net.
– Only use the variable cargo floor
panel in the folded-up position when
the backrests are folded up and
locked.
– Fold down the variable cargo floor
panel before driving off.
– Always secure cargo against shifting,
using straps, belts and lashing eyes,
for instance.
Seite 205
Cargo area CONTROLS
205
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Fold up the cargo floor panel
Fold up the cargo floor panel in the lower
position and push it behind the locks, arrow.
You've reached the maximum cargo height.
Upper position
– With the backrests folded down, a long,
flat loading surface is produced.
– Maximum load in this position:
330 lbs/150 kg.
– Space for objects remains between the
fixed and variable cargo area floor.
Seite 206
CONTROLS Cargo area
206
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Seite 207
Cargo area CONTROLS
207
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and
functions that are not necessarily available
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Breaking-in period
General information
Moving parts need to begin working to-
gether smoothly.
The following instructions will help you to
achieve a long vehicle life and good effi-
ciency.
Safety information
Warning
Due to new parts and components, safety
and driver assistance systems can react
with a delay. There is a risk of accident.
After installing new parts or with a new
vehicle, drive conservatively and inter-
vene early if necessary. Observe the break-
in procedures of the respective parts and
components.
Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufac-
turing circumstances when tires are brand-
new; they achieve their full traction poten-
tial after a break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brake discs and brake pads only reach their
full effectiveness after ap-
prox. 300 miles/500 km. Drive moderately
during this break-in period.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be ob-
served if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of
the vehicle's operating life.
General driving notes
Closing the tailgate
Safety information
Warning
An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi-
cle and can endanger occupants and other
traffic participants or damage the vehicle
in the event of an accident, braking or eva-
sive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury or
risk of damage to property. Do not drive
with the tailgate open.
Driving with the tailgate open
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
– Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
Seite 208
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
208
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
– Greatly increase the air flow from the
vents.
– Drive moderately.
Ice on window glass
NOTICE
The window will be lowered slightly when
pulling on the door handle. In the event of
frost, the window may freeze up and not
be lowered. There is a risk of damage to
property. When pulling on the door han-
dle, make sure that the window is lowered.
If necessary, remove snow and ice from
the window. Do not open the door with
force.
Mobile communication devices in
the vehicle
Warning
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can
influence one another. There is radiation
due to the transmission operations of mo-
bile phones. There is a risk of injury or
risk of damage to property. If possible, in
the car's interior use only mobile phones
with direct connections to an exterior an-
tenna in order to exclude mutual interfer-
ence and deflect the radiation from the
car's interior.
Hydroplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water
can form between the tires and road sur-
face.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydro-
planing. It is characterized by a partial or
complete loss of contact between the tires
and the road surface, ultimately undermin-
ing your ability to steer and brake the vehi-
cle.
Driving through water
General information
When driving through water, follow the fol-
lowing:
– Drive through calm water only.
– Drive through water only if it is not
deeper than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm.
– Drive through water no faster than
walking speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
Safety information
NOTICE
When driving too quickly through too
deep water, water can enter into the en-
gine compartment, the electrical system or
the transmission. There is a risk of damage
to property. When driving through water,
do not exceed the maximum indicated wa-
ter level and the maximum speed for driv-
ing through water.
Braking safely
General information
The vehicle is equipped with an Antilock
Braking System ABS as a standard feature.
Perform an emergency stop in situations
that require such.
Steering is still responsive. You can still
avoid any obstacles with a minimum of
steering effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds
from the hydraulic circuits indicate that
ABS is in its active mode.
Seite 209
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
209
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Objects in the area around the pedals
Warning
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed
pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow ob-
jects in the vehicle such that they are se-
cured and cannot enter into the driver's
floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable
for the vehicle and can be safely attached
to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats
and do not layer several floor mats. Make
sure that there is sufficient clearance for
the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are
securely fastened again after they were re-
moved, for instance for cleaning.
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy
rain, gently press the brake pedal every few
miles.
Ensure that this action does not endanger
other traffic.
The heat generated during braking dries
brake discs and brake pads and protects
them against corrosion.
In this way braking efficiency will be avail-
able when you need it.
Hills
General information
The braking effect of the drive system can
be influenced through the energy recovery.
Safety information
Warning
Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing
out and possibly even brake failure. There
is a risk of accident. Avoid placing exces-
sive stress on the brake system.
Warning
In idle state or with drive-ready state
switched off, safety-relevant functions, for
instance drive system braking effect, brak-
ing force boost and steering assistance,
are restricted or not available at all. There
is a risk of accident. Do not drive in idle
state or with drive-ready state switched
off.
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contami-
nation on the brake pads are increased by
the following circumstances:
– Low mileage.
– Extended periods when the vehicle is
not used at all.
– Infrequent use of the brakes.
– Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
agents.
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will
cause a pulsating effect on the brakes in
their response - generally this cannot be
corrected.
Condensation water under the
parked vehicle
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water develops and collects
underneath the vehicle.
Seite 210
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
210
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Ground clearance
NOTICE
If the ground clearance is insufficient, e.g.,
curbs or underground garage entrances,
contact with vehicle parts, e.g., spoiler,
and the underbody may occur. There is a
risk of damage to property. Ensure that
there is sufficient ground clearance availa-
ble.
Roof-mounted luggage rack
General information
Installation only possible with roof rack.
Roof racks are available as special accesso-
ries.
Mounting
Follow the installation instructions of the
roof rack.
Loading
Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise
the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded,
they have a major effect on vehicle handling
and steering response.
Therefore, note the following when loading
and driving:
– Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
– Be sure that adequate clearance is main-
tained for tilting and opening the glass
sunroof.
– Distribute the roof load uniformly.
– The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
– Always place the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
– Secure the roof luggage firmly, for in-
stance using ratchet straps.
– Do not let objects project into the open-
ing path of the tailgate.
– Drive cautiously and avoid sudden ac-
celeration and braking maneuvers. Take
corners gently.
Driving on racetracks
Warning
The vehicle is not designed for use in M
Sport or motor sport type competition.
There is a risk of accident. Do not use the
vehicle for M Sport or motor sport type
competitions.
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
racetrack operation lead to increased wear.
This wear is not covered by the warranty.
Seite 211
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
211
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Increasing range
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and
functions that are not necessarily available
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
General information
The vehicle contains comprehensive tech-
nologies for reducing energy consumption
and for maximizing the range.
The range depends on a number of different
factors, refer to page 125.
The implementation of certain measures,
driving style and regular maintenance can
increasing the range and thereby also re-
duce the environmental impact.
Remove unnecessary cargo
Additional weight reduces the range.
Remove attached parts follow-
ing use
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof-mounted or
rear luggage racks which are no longer re-
quired following use.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the
aerodynamics and increase the energy con-
sumption.
Close the windows and glass
sunroof
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
open results in increased air resistance and
thereby reduces the range.
Tires
General information
Tires can affect energy consumption in vari-
ous ways, for instance energy consumption
can be influenced by tire size.
Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
Check and, if needed, correct the tire infla-
tion pressure at least twice a month and be-
fore starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling
resistance and thus raises energy consump-
tion and tire wear.
Stationary climate control
Run advance climate control, refer to
page 184, in the vehicle during charging be-
fore driving off.
Heating and cooling operations are very en-
ergy intensive and substantially reduce the
electric range.
Seite 212
DRIVING TIPS Increasing range
212
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Look well ahead when driving
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces
energy consumption.
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and brak-
ing.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the
vehicle driving ahead of you.
Longer braking procedures result in more
efficient charging of the high-voltage bat-
tery via energy recovery from braking.
Use accelerator pedal for de-
celeration and coasting
When approaching a red light, use accelera-
tor pedal for decelerating.
For going downhill use coasting function;
for this purpose, press accelerator pedal just
enough that the vehicle rolls.
Switch off any functions that
are not currently needed
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
window defroster require a lot of energy
and reduce the range, especially in city and
stop-and-go traffic.
Switch off these functions if they are not
needed.
The GREEN and GREEN+ driving modes
support the energy-conserving use of com-
fort features. They automatically perform a
partial or complete deactivation of these
functions.
Have maintenance carried out
Have the vehicle maintained regularly to
achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and serv-
ice life. MINI recommends that mainte-
nance work be performed by a MINI service
center.
Also note the MINI maintenance systems,
refer to page 248.
Using eDRIVE efficiently
Concept
eDRIVE operates automatically. Proactive
driving utilizes energy consumption and en-
ergy recovery optimally. Energy recovery is
used to charge the high-voltage battery. En-
ergy recovery is important for the supply of
electrical components and thus a prerequi-
site for a long range. Energy consumption
and recovery depend very much, among
other things, on your driving style.
Optimizing driving style
Performance display
Your driving style can be optimized using
the performance display.
The energy recovery occurs during coasting
and braking and is displayed in the perform-
ance display by the accelerator pedal indica-
tor.
Seite 213
Increasing range DRIVING TIPS
213
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
The accelerator pedal indicator is within the
CHARGE range.
Efficient energy recovery:
– The accelerator pedal moves in the yel-
low range of the CHARGE display, ar-
row 1.
– The energy use while driving can be op-
timized by efficient acceleration.
Set high energy recovery, refer to page 106,
to recover as much energy as possible.
Efficient acceleration:
– The accelerator pedal moves in the yel-
low range of the ePOWER display, ar-
row 2.
– Use deceleration by coasting as often as
possible for energy recovery.
Discharge of the high-voltage
battery
General information
Longer idle periods, refer to page 266, can
reduce the charge state of the high-voltage
battery.
Safety information
NOTICE
The high-voltage battery can be damaged
if left uncharged or with low charge for ex-
tended periods. There is a risk of damage
to property. Before storing the vehicle for
an extended period, ensure that the high-
voltage battery is fully charged. During the
idle period, connect the vehicle to a charg-
ing station at a compatible charging loca-
tion. If necessary, the high-voltage battery
will be charged automatically. Make sure
that charging is carried out. Regularly
check the charge state.
Do not allow the vehicle to sit idle for lon-
ger than four weeks with a charge state
below approx. 80 %.
GREEN Mode
Concept
GREEN Mode supports a driving style that
saves on consumption. For this purpose, the
engine control and comfort features, for in-
stance the climate control output, are ad-
justed.
In addition, context-sensitive instructions
are displayed to assist with an efficient
driving style.
General information
The system includes the following MINI-
MALISM functions and MINIMALISM dis-
plays:
– GREEN Limit, refer to page 215
– GREEN climate control, refer to
page 215.
– GREEN tip, driving instruction, refer to
page 215.
– MINIMALISM analyzer, refer to
page 216.
Activating GREEN Mode
Press the MINI Driving Modes
switch downward until
GREEN is displayed in the in-
strument cluster.
Configuring GREEN
Via MINI Driving Modes switch
1. Activating GREEN Mode.
2. "Configure GREEN"
Seite 214
DRIVING TIPS Increasing range
214
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
3. Select the desired setting.
Via the Central Information Display
(CID)
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Configure GREEN"
4. Select the desired setting.
Activating/deactivating the functions
The following functions can be activated/
deactivated:
– "GREEN speed warning"
– "GREEN climate control"
– "Coasting"
Settings are stored for the driver profile
currently used.
GREEN Limit
– "GREEN speed warning": GREEN Limit
is activated.
A GREEN tip is displayed if the speed of
the set GREEN Limit is exceeded.
– "Tip at:"
Set the desired speed for the GREEN
Limit.
When GREEN+ is activated, the GREEN
Limit is set to 55 mph/90 km/h.
GREEN climate control
Climate control is set to be efficient.
By making a slight change to the set tem-
perature and adjusting the rate of heating
or cooling of the car's interior consumption
can be economized.
The power output to the seat heater and ex-
terior mirror is reduced.
GREEN potential savings
Shows potential savings with the current
settings in percentages.
Display in the instrument cluster
GREEN tip, driving instruction
General information
The GREEN tip indicates that your driving
style can be modified to be more efficient,
for example by backing off the accelerator.
Activating/deactivating the display
Activate information relating to the driving
style and GREEN tips in the instrument
cluster using the Central Information Dis-
play (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "GREEN info"
GREEN tip, symbols
An additional symbol and text instructions
are displayed.
Symbol Measure
For an efficient driving style,
look well ahead when driving,
accelerate conservatively, and
delay accelerating.
Reduce speed to the selected
GREEN speed.
Seite 215
Increasing range DRIVING TIPS
215
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Indications on the Control Display
Displaying MINIMALISM information
The current efficiency of the functions in
GREEN Mode can be displayed on the Con-
trol Display.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "MINIMALISM"
Information is shown on the following func-
tions:
– Auto Start/Stop function.
– Energy recovery.
MINIMALISM analyzer
Concept
In this situation, the function helps develop
an especially efficient driving style and to
save energy.
For this purpose, the driving style is ana-
lyzed. The assessment is done in various
categories and is displayed on the Control
Display.
This display will help you adjust your driv-
ing style and save some energy.
Functional requirement
This function is available in GREEN Mode.
Displaying the MINIMALISM analyzer
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "MINIMALISM Analyser"
Display on the Control Display
The display of the MINIMALISM analyzer
consists of a fish in a water glass and a
value table.
The fish and the movements of the water in
the bowl symbolize the efficiency of the
driving style.
Depending on the equipment, the fish is
shown with efficient and inefficient driving
style or only with inefficient driving style.
The more efficient the driving style, the less
the water sloshes around in the bowl and
the better is the fish's mood. If the driving
style is inefficient, the water oscillates, the
fish's mood worsens, and a reduced number
of stars is displayed.
The table of values contains stars and evalu-
ates the driving style in different catego-
ries. The more efficient the driving style,
the more stars are displayed in the table.
To assist with an efficient driving style,
GREEN tips are displayed while driving.
Tips for an energy-saving driving style, In-
creasing the range, refer to page 212.
Seite 216
DRIVING TIPS Increasing range
216
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Seite 217
Increasing range DRIVING TIPS
217
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Charging the vehicle
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and
functions that are not necessarily available
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Concept
The vehicle can be charged using various
charging cables at charging stations or
household sockets. Control and monitoring
of the charging process are handled com-
pletely automatically. The charge current
strength can be set via the Central Informa-
tion Display (CID).
General information
High-voltage battery
The high-voltage battery is used as an en-
ergy accumulator. The high-voltage battery
can be charged by energy recovery during
the trip or via the power grid.
In order to operate the high-voltage battery
optimally, charge the vehicle regularly and
fully using a compatible charger.
When charging via the power grid, you can
chose between the following variants.
– Level 1 charging via a household socket.
– Level 2 charging via a Level 2 charging
station.
– Charging via a DC charging station.
Level 1 charging is possible via a household
socket with a voltage of 120 volts.
For optimal use of the energy from the
power mains, charging at a charging sta-
tion, for instance BMW Wallbox, is recom-
mended.
Charge current
General information
The charge current strength is indicated in
amperes.
The vehicle cannot automatically detect the
maximum permissible charge current
strength of the power grid during charging
via a household socket or charging station.
Level 1 charging
Prior to the first Level 1 charging at your
own household socket, or at other house-
hold sockets, the permitted charge current
strength must be determined by a qualified
electrician, for example.
The charge current strength for
Level 1 charging, refer to page 224, can be
adjusted in the vehicle in three levels.
At delivery, the charge current for
Level 1 charging is set to the lowest level.
Depending on the country-specific version,
one of several ampere ratings is printed on
the Level 1 charging cable. This ampere rat-
ing is the limit which must be adhered to
for the vehicle if the charge current is set to
the highest level. Depending on the charg-
ing cable, the charge current strength may
vary when lower levels are set.
Seite 218
MOBILITY Charging the vehicle
218
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Overview
Imprint on the charging cable Charge current setting
"Max." "Reduced" "Low"
6 A 6 A 6 A 6 A
8 A 8 A 6 A 6 A
10 A 10 A 7.5 A 6 A
12 A 12 A 9 A 6 A
15 A 15 A 11.25 A 7.5 A
Depending on the charge current setting,
the charging duration changes.
Safety information
Warning
Improper working with electrical current
can lead to an electric shock due to high
voltages or high currents. There is a risk
of fire or danger to life. Observe the gen-
eral safety regulations when working with
electrical current.
Warning
A faulty and incorrectly designed charging
device at the charging location can cause
damage to the vehicle and overload the
power mains at the charging location.
There is a risk of fire and a risk of injury.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends that, prior to your first use of a
charging location, you have the compati-
bility of the following components con-
firmed:
– Charging cable.
– Charging station.
– Household socket and connected cir-
cuits.
Warning
Damaged or worn charging devices, for in-
stance worn contacts, can heat up. There
is a risk of fire. Only use charging devices
that are in good condition.
Warning
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. High voltage is present
at the charging connection. There is a risk
of injury or danger to life.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends that work on the charging connec-
tion, for instance cleaning, be performed
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Charging cable
General information
Use a Level 1 charging cable, Level 2 charg-
ing cable or the permanently installed
charging cable of a charging station to
charge the vehicle.
Seite 219
Charging the vehicle MOBILITY
219
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Different charging cables can be required
depending on the country.
Safety information
Warning
Non-compatible charging cables or unsuit-
able charging stations can heat up and
cause damage to the vehicle. There is a
risk of fire. Use charging cables or charg-
ing stations for charging that are suitable
for the respective vehicle type.
A dealer's service center will be glad to
provide information about suitable charg-
ing cables.
Warning
Improper use of the charging cable can
prevent charging and lead to damage, for
instance cable fire. There is a risk of fire.
Use the charging cable only for charging
the vehicle, and do not extend it using ca-
bles or adapters.
Warning
Damaged charging cables can heat up or
lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of
fire or a risk of injury. Use undamaged
charging cables only.
Level 1 charging cable
The vehicle is supplied with a
Level 1 charging cable.
Level 1 charging cables can be used to
charge the vehicle from grounded house-
hold sockets. Charging at household socket
connections is performed with alternating
current.
When a Level 1 charging cable is used, the
efficiency values may differ from those
stated on the energy label.
Level 2 charging cable
The Level 2 charging cable makes it possi-
ble to quickly recharge at sockets of desig-
nated Level 2 charging stations using a spe-
cial plug. Charging is performed with
alternating current at designated
Level 2 charging stations. The charging
process can be completed faster than at
household sockets.
A charge current strength of up to maxi-
mum 16 A is possible.
The charging cable may be permanently in-
stalled at the charging station.
DC charging cable
The DC charging cable that is permanently
installed at the charging station makes is
possible to charge at DC charging stations.
Charging is performed with direct current
at designated DC charging stations. At the
higher capacity current connection of a DC
charger station the charging time is signifi-
cantly lower than with a household socket
or a Level 2 charging station.
During charging at a DC charging station,
an indication in the instrument cluster, re-
fer to page 225, is displayed.
The DC charging cable is also referred to as
Level 3 DC charging cable.
Seite 220
MOBILITY Charging the vehicle
220
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Storage
The Level 1 charging cable is located in a
bag in the cargo area.
Store charging cable again in the bag after
use. Attach the bag to the designated eyelet.
If required, store the charging cable with
the installed plug cover to prevent moisture
in the charging cable plug.
Connecting
Charging socket flap
The charging socket flap is located on the
right side of the vehicle.
Always keep charging socket clean and un-
obstructed.
Keep the charging socket flap closed when
the charging socket is not used.
Connecting the charging cable
To connect, engage selector lever posi-
tion P, deactivate drive-ready state, and un-
lock the vehicle. Set the parking brake, if
needed.
1. Tap on the charging socket flap, arrow.
The charging socket flap opens.
2. Remove the charging socket lid, arrow.
3. Remove the cover of the charging cable
plug, if needed.
4. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the
household socket or Level 2 charging
cable to the port on the charging station.
5. Insert the appropriate charging cable
plug, and push it in until it engages.
When charging at a charging station, follow
the instructions at the charging station.
Removing
When the charging process is active and
the vehicle is locked, the charging cable is
automatically locked. Unlock the vehicle be-
fore removing the cable.
When the charging process is completed,
the charging cable is automatically un-
locked.
Seite 221
Charging the vehicle MOBILITY
221
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
If necessary, clean the area between the
charging socket flap and charging socket,
for instance from snow, before removing it.
1. Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key
if it is locked.
Charging cable is unlocked.
2. Press the release button on the handle,
arrow 1, and grasp the charging cable at
the gripping areas.
Charging process is interrupted.
3. Remove the charging cable from the
charging socket, arrow 2.
4. Put the charging socket lid back on.
5. Press on the charging socket flap until it
engages.
6. Attach cover of the charging cable plug,
if needed.
7. Disconnect Level 1 charging cable from
the household socket or Level 2 charg-
ing cable from the port on the charging
station as applicable.
8. Stow the charging cable.
At a charging station, insert the perma-
nently installed charging cable in the
place provided for it.
Electrical unlocking of the
charging cable
Concept
In the following situations, the charging ca-
ble can be unlocked and removed electroni-
cally:
– When the vehicle is locked.
– When a charging station is defective.
Unlocking
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Settings charging current"
4. "Unlock charging cable"
Charging process
General information
At high temperatures, the high-voltage bat-
tery is initially cooled. There may be a delay
before charging starts. If the high-voltage
battery is discharged, cooling of the high-
voltage battery may not be possible. The
charging process cannot be started.
If the Level 1 charging cable is exposed to
high temperatures and direct sunlight, this
may interrupt the charging process. Charg-
ing will resume automatically.
The charging process may take longer under
extremely low or high temperatures.
Seite 222
MOBILITY Charging the vehicle
222
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Safety information
Warning
Improper use of the power mains connec-
tion can lead to damage, for instance cable
fire. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Use the charging ca-
ble only for charging the vehicle, and do
not extend it using cables or adapters.
Warning
If the charge current strength is adjusted
incorrectly, the power mains of the house-
hold socket can be overloaded and over-
heat. There is a risk of fire. Adjust the
charge current strength to the power
mains prior to charging on household
sockets. With unknown power networks,
set on the lowest level.
Starting the charging process
1. Engage selector lever position P. Set the
parking brake, if needed.
2. For planning the charging process, refer
to page 224.
3. Switch off drive-ready state.
4. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the
household socket or Level 2 charging
cable to the port on the charging station.
5. Open the charging socket flap.
6. Connect the charging cable to the vehi-
cle, refer to page 221.
7. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked.
Charging status display
Indicator light at the charging socket
An indicator light is located on the charging
socket.
Charging status
Light Charging status
White Charging cable can be con-
nected or removed.
Flashes or-
ange
Charging process is being
prepared.
Yellow Charging process paused.
Flashes yel-
low
Charging process is active.
Flashes red
rapidly
Fault in the charging proc-
ess.
Green Charging process is com-
pleted.
When the vehicle is locked, the indicator
light goes out after some time.
When the vehicle is unlocked, the yellow
indicator light flashes continuously. The
other indicator lights go out after some
time.
Press the button on the vehicle key to
check the charging state. The charging sta-
tus is indicated on the indicator light. In
some cases the vehicle is locked.
Seite 223
Charging the vehicle MOBILITY
223
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Additional messages about the charging sta-
tus, for instance the probable end of charg-
ing or the planned departure time, can be
shown in the instrument cluster or on the
Control Display.
Planning the charging process
General information
The charging process can be adapted to
constraints, for instance the cost of electric-
ity. The vehicle controls the charging proc-
ess in such a way that the charging process
is completed if possible at the departure
time. A departure time must be set for this
purpose, refer to page 225.
The following settings are available:
– Immediate charging.
– Set time window for favorable charging.
– Set the charge current for charging via a
Level 1 charging cable.
If drive-ready state is switched off, changes
can be made via the Central Information
Display (CID). Settings for the stationary cli-
mate control and charging process are also
accepted for planned departure times.
Setting the charging mode
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. Select the desired setting:
– "Charge immediately": the charging
process starts as soon as the charg-
ing cable is connected.
– "Charge for departure time": if a de-
parture time is set, a time window
for charging with a favorable elec-
tricity rate can be set.
Setting the time window for favorable-
rate
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Set low cost time slot"
4. Set rate begin.
5. Set rate end.
The vehicle can also start the charging proc-
ess before the selected time window begins
or end it after the selected time window fin-
ishes. The starting point of the charging
process is adjusted so the vehicle can be as
fully charged as possible and, if applicable,
its climate adjusted by the departure time.
Setting the charge current for
charging via a Level 1 charging cable
Depending on the electrical mains, the vehi-
cle must be charged with a different charge
current strength, refer to page 218.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Settings charging current"
4. "Level 1 (120V)"
Settings are stored. When you change
charging locations you also might need to
change the setting for charging.
Set the charge current strength at other
household sockets to the lowest level.
Stopping the charging process
The charging process can be stopped at any
time by removing the charging cable and
continued at a later time by connecting the
charging cable. This enables, for instance
the use of other loads on the power connec-
tion or prevents simultaneous high power
from multiple loads.
Seite 224
MOBILITY Charging the vehicle
224
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
For removing the charging cable, refer to
page 221.
Continuing the charging process
If the charging process is interrupted, for
instance through a temporary power failure,
the charging process is automatically con-
tinued after the interruption.
Terminating the charging process
1. Remove the charging cable from the ve-
hicle, refer to page 221.
2. Stow the charging cable as required.
3. Close the charging socket flap.
4. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked.
Displays in the instrument
cluster
The charge state indicator light, refer to
page 120, shows the charge state of the
high-voltage battery in the instrument clus-
ter, if the standby state or drive-ready state
is switched on. If all bars are filled, the
high-voltage battery is fully charged.
Even if no bars are filled, the high-voltage
system is still under high voltage.
Information regarding the charging process
is shown on the charging screen.
Display Meaning
Ring orange: the charging proc-
ess is being prepared.
Ring yellow animated: the
charging process is active or it
will start at the set time.
Ring yellow: the charging proc-
ess pauses.
Ring red: fault in the charging
process.
Ring green: the charging proc-
ess is completed.
End of charging time or set de-
parture time.
DC charging active on a DC
charging station.
Departure time set.
Climate control activated at de-
parture time.
Flashing: ventilation active.
Flashing: heating active.
Flashing: cooling active.
Departure time
Concept
For optimum range and climate control, the
departure time can be set before parking
the vehicle.
Seite 225
Charging the vehicle MOBILITY
225
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
General information
With a set departure time, the vehicle is
preheated or precooled during the charging
process if climate control is set. Climate
control output is reduced during the trip.
This increases the range during electric
driving.
The following settings are possible for de-
parture time:
– Climate control for departure time.
– Planning of up to two regular departure
times.
If drive-ready state is switched off, changes
can be made via the Central Information
Display (CID). Settings for climate control
and charging process are also applied for
scheduled departure times.
Climate control for departure time
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Precondition for departure"
Setting the departure time
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Set departure time"
4. Set the desired days of the week, if
needed.
5. Set the desired time.
Up to three departure times can be set.
Activating the departure time
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "Plan charging/climate control"
3. "Set departure time"
Set departure times are displayed.
4. For example activate "Departure time 1".
Up to two departure times can be activated.
The set departure time will be deactivated,
if the departure time was ignored three
times in a row.
Climate control
The following settings for vehicle air condi-
tioning are possible:
– Activate stationary climate control im-
mediately, refer to page 184.
The range is reduced if stationary cli-
mate control is activated without a
charging cable connected.
– Planned climate control at the set depar-
ture time, refer to page 185.
If a Mode 2 charging cable is used, the
high-voltage battery may not be fully
charged at departure time.
Discharged high-voltage and
vehicle battery
General information
In addition to the high-voltage battery, the
vehicle has a 12 volt vehicle battery, which
is required for operation of the onboard
electronics.
With a discharged vehicle battery, no oper-
ation of the vehicle is possible.
Seite 226
MOBILITY Charging the vehicle
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Wheels and tires
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and
functions that are not necessarily available
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Tire inflation pressure
General information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation
pressure influence the following:
– The service life of the tires.
– Road safety.
– Driving comfort.
– Fuel consumption.
Safety information
Warning
A tire with too little or no tire inflation
pressure may heat up significantly and
sustain damage. This will have a negative
impact on aspects of handling, such as
steering and braking response. There is a
risk of accident. Regularly check the tire
inflation pressure, and correct it as
needed, for instance twice a month and be-
fore a long trip.
Tire inflation pressure
specifications
In the tire inflation pressure table
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 228, contains all tire inflation pres-
sure specifications for the specified tire
sizes at the ambient temperature. The tire
inflation pressure values apply to tire sizes
approved by the manufacturer of the vehicle
for the vehicle type.
To identify the correct tire inflation pres-
sure, please note the following:
– Tire sizes of your vehicle.
– Maximum permitted driving speed.
Checking the tire inflation pressure
General information
Tires heat up while driving. The tire infla-
tion pressure increases with the tire tem-
perature.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire
inflation pressure.
The displays of inflation devices may under-
read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
Checking using tire inflation pressure
specifications in the tire inflation
pressure table
The tire inflation pressure specifications in
the tire inflation pressure table only relate
to cold tires or tires at the same tempera-
ture as the ambient temperature.
Only check the tire inflation pressure levels
when the tires are cold, i.e.:
– Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km
has not been exceeded.
Seite 227
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
227
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
– If the vehicle has not moved again for at
least 2 hours after a trip.
1. Determine the intended tire inflation
pressure levels for the mounted tires.
2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all
four tires, using a pressure gage, for ex-
ample.
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the
actual tire inflation pressure deviates
from the intended tire inflation pres-
sure.
4. Check whether all valve caps are
screwed onto the tire valves.
After correcting the tire inflation
pressure
For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires.
For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset
the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
Tire pressures
To achieve optimum driving comfort, note
the tire inflation pressure specifications in
the Tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 228, and adjust as needed.
These pressure values can also be found on
the tire inflation pressure label on the driv-
er's door pillar.
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/
160 km/h.
Tire pressure values
COOPER SE
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI
Specifications
in bar/PSI with
cold tires
195/55 R 16 87
W
195/55 R 16 87
H M+S
2.4 / 35 2.2 / 32
205/45 R 17 88
V XL A/S
205/45 R 17 88
W XL
205/45 R 17 88
V XL M+S
2.6 / 38 2.4 / 35
175/60 R 16 86
H XL M+S
185/50 R 17 86
H XL M+S
2.8 / 41 2.6 / 38
Tire identification marks
Tire size
205/45 R 17 84 V
205: nominal width in mm
45: aspect ratio in %
R: radial tire code
17: rim diameter in inches
84: load rating, not for ZR tires
V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
Seite 228
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
228
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Maximum tire load
Maximum tire load is the maximum permis-
sible weight for which the tire is approved.
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire
sidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating
– GAWR – on the certification label on the
driver’s door pillar. Divide the tire load by
1.1. It must be greater than one-half of the
vehicle’s Gross Axle Weight Rating –
GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and tire
loads, respectively.
Speed letter
Designation Maximum speed
Q up to 100 mph/160 km/h
R: up to 106 mph/170 km/h
S up to 112 mph/180 km/h
T up to 118 mph/190 km/h
H up to 131 mph/210 km/h
V up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
DOT-Code: DOT xxxx xxx 0120
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
xxx: tire size and tire design
0120: tire age
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines
of the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire age
Recommendation
Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at
least every 6 years.
Manufacture date
You can find the manufacture date of the
tire on the tire's sidewall.
Designation Manufacture date
DOT … 0120 1st week 2020
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applica-
ble on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width.
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera-
ture A
DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. E.g., a
tire graded 150 would wear one and one-
half, 1 g, times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the ac-
tual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service prac-
tices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
Seite 229
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
229
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
controlled conditions on specified govern-
ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction per-
formance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest,
B, and C, representing the tire's resistance
to the generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive tempera-
ture can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of perform-
ance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A
represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Warning
The temperature grade for this tire is es-
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed, un-
derinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
RSC – Run-flat tires
Run-flat tires, refer to page 233, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the let-
ters RSC marked on the sidewall.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires.
Tire tread
Summer tires
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an in-
creased risk of hydroplaning.
Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable
for winter operation.
Minimum tread depth
Wear indicators are distributed around the
tire's circumference and have the legally re-
quired minimum height of 0.063 in-
ches/1.6 mm.
The positions of the wear indicators are
marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread
Wear Indicator.
Seite 230
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
230
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Tire damage
General information
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, for-
eign objects lodged in the tread, and tread
wear.
Driving over rough or damaged road surfa-
ces, as well as debris, curbs and other obsta-
cles can cause serious damage to wheels,
tires and suspension parts. This is more
likely to occur with low-profile tires, which
provide less cushioning between the wheel
and the road. Be careful to avoid road haz-
ards and reduce your speed, especially if
your vehicle is equipped with low-profile
tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle
malfunctions:
– Unusual vibrations.
– Unusual tire or running noises.
– Unusual handling such as a strong ten-
dency to pull to the left or right.
Damage can be caused by the following sit-
uations, for instance:
– Driving over curbs.
– Road damage.
– Tire inflation pressure too low.
– Vehicle overloading.
– Incorrect tire storage.
Safety information
Warning
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres-
sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle con-
trol. There is a risk of accident. If tire dam-
age is suspected while driving,
immediately reduce speed and stop. Have
wheels and tires checked. For this pur-
pose, drive carefully to the nearest dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop. Have vehicle towed
or transported as needed. Do not repair
damaged tires, but have them replaced.
Warning
Tires can become damaged by driving over
obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at
high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller
tire cross-section. The smaller the tire
cross-section, the higher the risk of tire
damage. There is a danger of accidents and
property damage. If possible, avoid driving
over objects or road conditions that may
damage tires, or drive over them slowly
and carefully.
Changing wheels and tires
Mounting and wheel balancing
Have mounting and tire and wheel balanc-
ing carried out by a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Light-alloy rim MINI Electric Corona
Spoke 2 Tone
A balancing weight is required for wheel
balancing.
The balancing weight is available as a spe-
cial tool from a dealer’s service center, an-
Seite 231
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
231
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
Have wheel balancing executed exclusively
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Wheel and tire combination
General information
You can ask the dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop about the correct wheel/tire combina-
tion and wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
Safety information
Warning
Wheels and tires which are not suitable
for your vehicle can damage parts of the
vehicle, for instance due to contact with
the body due to tolerances despite the
same official size rating. There is a risk of
an accident. The manufacturer of your ve-
hicle strongly suggests that you use
wheels and tires that have been recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer for
your vehicle type.
Warning
Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will
have a negative impact on the vehicle's
handling and on the function of a variety
of systems, such as the ABS Antilock Brak-
ing System or DSC Dynamic Stability Con-
trol. There is a risk of accident. To main-
tain good handling and vehicle response,
use only tires with a single tread configu-
ration from a single manufacturer. The
manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you use wheels and tires that have
been recommended by the vehicle manu-
facturer for your vehicle type. Following
tire damage, have the original wheel/tire
combination remounted on the vehicle as
soon as possible.
Recommended tire brands
For each tire size, the manufacturer of the
vehicle recommends certain tire brands.
The tire brands can be identified by a star
on the tire sidewall.
New tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufac-
turing circumstances when tires are brand-
new; they achieve their full traction poten-
tial after a break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Retreaded tires
Warning
Retreaded tires can have different tire cas-
ing structures. With advanced age the
service life can be limited. There is a risk
of an accident. The manufacturer of your
vehicle does not recommend the use of re-
treaded tires.
The manufacturer of the vehicle does not
recommend the use of retreaded tires.
Seite 232
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
232
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Winter tires
Winter tires are recommended for operat-
ing on winter roads.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro-
vide better winter traction than summer
tires, they usually do not provide the same
level of performance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is
higher than the permissible speed for the
winter tires, then attach a label showing the
permissible maximum speed in the field of
view. The label is available from a dealer's
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
With winter tires mounted, observe and do
not exceed the permissible maximum speed.
Changing runflat tires
For your own safety, use only runflat tires.
Further information is available from a deal-
er's service center or another qualified serv-
ice center or repair shop.
Rotating wheels between axles
Different wear patterns can occur on the
front and rear axles depending on individual
driving conditions. The tires can be rotated
in pairs between the axles to achieve even
wear. Further information is available from
a dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop. After rotating,
check the tire pressure and correct, if
needed.
Storing tires
Tire inflation pressure
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation
pressure indicated on the side wall of the
tire.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and
dark place.
Always protect tires against all contact with
oil, grease, and solvents.
Do not leave tires in plastic bags.
Remove dirt from wheels or tires.
Run-flat tires
Concept
Run-flat tires permit continued driving un-
der restricted conditions even in the event
of a complete loss of tire inflation pressure.
General information
The wheels are composed of tires that are
self-supporting to a limited degree.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire
to remain drivable to a restricted degree in
the event of a tire inflation pressure loss.
Follow the instructions for continued driv-
ing with a flat tire.
Safety information
Warning
The vehicle handles differently when a
run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire
pressure; for instance, reduced lane stabil-
ity when braking, braking distances are
longer and the self-steering properties will
change. There is a risk of accident. Drive
moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
Seite 233
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
233
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Label
The tires are marked on the tire sidewall
with RSC Run-flat System Component.
Repairing a flat tire
Safety measures
– Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
– Switch on the hazard warning system.
– Secure the vehicle against rolling away
by setting the parking brake.
– Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead posi-
tion and engage the steering wheel lock.
– Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out-
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
– If necessary, set up a warning triangle
at an appropriate distance.
Mobility System
Concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire dam-
age can be sealed temporarily to enable con-
tinued travel. To accomplish this, sealant is
pumped into the tires, which seals the dam-
age from the inside.
General information
– Follow the instructions on using the
Mobility System found on the compres-
sor and sealant container.
– Use of the Mobility System may be inef-
fective if the tire puncture measures ap-
prox. 1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
– Contact a dealer's service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair
shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
– Do not remove foreign bodies that have
penetrated the tire. Only remove foreign
objects if they are visibly protruding
from the tire.
– Pull the speed limit sticker off the seal-
ant container and apply it to the steer-
ing wheel.
– The use of a sealant can damage the
TPM wheel electronics. In this case,
have the TPM wheel electronics re-
placed at the next opportunity.
– The compressor can be used to check
the tire inflation pressure.
Overview
Storage
The Mobility System is in a bag on the right
side of the cargo area.
Sealant container
– Sealant container, arrow 1.
– Filling hose, arrow 2.
Seite 234
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
234
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Observe use-by date on the sealant con-
tainer.
Compressor
1 Sealant container unlocking
2 Sealant container holder
3 Tire pressure gage
4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button
5 On/off switch
6 Compressor
7 Connector/cable for socket
8 Connection hose
Safety measures
– Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
– Switch on the hazard warning system.
– Secure the vehicle against rolling away
by setting the parking brake.
– Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead posi-
tion and engage the steering wheel lock.
– Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out-
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
– If necessary, set up a warning triangle
at an appropriate distance.
Filling the tire with sealant
Safety information
NOTICE
The compressor can overheat during ex-
tended operation. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Do not run the compres-
sor for more than 10 minutes.
Filling
1. Shake the sealant container.
2. Pull filling hose completely out of the
cover of the sealant container. Do not
kink the hose.
Seite 235
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
235
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
3. Slide the sealant container into the
holder on the compressor housing, en-
suring that it engages audibly.
4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con-
tainer onto the tire valve of the non-
working wheel.
5. With the compressor switched off, in-
sert the plug into the power socket in-
side the vehicle.
6. With standby state or drive-ready state
switched on, switch on the compressor.
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes
to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a
tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant,
the tire inflation pressure may sporadically
reach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the
compressor at this point.
Checking and adjusting the tire
inflation pressure
Checking
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the
tire pressure gage.
To continue the trip, a tire inflation pres-
sure of at least 2 bar must be reached.
Removing and stowing the sealant
container
1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant
container from the tire valve.
2. Press the red unlocking device.
3. Remove the sealant container from the
compressor.
4. Wrap and store the sealant container in
suitable material to avoid dirtying the
cargo area.
Seite 236
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
236
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Minimum tire inflation pressure is not
reached
1. Pull the connector out of the power
socket inside the vehicle.
2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to
distribute the sealant in the tire.
3. Screw the connection hose of the com-
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.
4. Insert the connector into the power
socket inside the vehicle.
5. With standby state or drive-ready state
switched on, switch on the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least
2 bar cannot be reached, contact your
dealer's service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least
2 bar is reached, see Minimum tire infla-
tion pressure is reached.
6. Unscrew the connection hose of the
compressor from the tire valve.
7. Pull the connector out of the power
socket inside the vehicle.
8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is
reached
1. Unscrew the connection hose of the
compressor from the tire valve.
2. Pull the connector out of the power
socket inside the vehicle.
3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
4. Immediately drive approx.
5 miles/10 km to ensure that the sealant
is evenly distributed in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less
than 12 mph/20 km/h.
Adjustment
1. Stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose of the com-
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.
Seite 237
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
237
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
3. Insert the connector into the power
socket inside the vehicle.
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at
least 2.0 bar.
– Increase tire inflation pressure: with
standby state or drive-ready state,
switch on the compressor.
– Reduce tire inflation pressure: press
the button on the compressor.
5. Unscrew the connection hose of the
compressor from the tire valve.
6. Pull the connector out of the power
socket inside the vehicle.
7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 150.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to
page 145.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant
container of the Mobility System promptly.
Snow chains
General information
The manufacturer of the vehicle has deter-
mined certain wheels and tires to be suita-
ble for operation on the vehicle. Mounting
of snow chains on these wheels and tires is
not permitted.
Safety information
Warning
With the mounting of snow chains on un-
suitable tires, the snow chains can come
into contact with vehicle parts. There may
be a risk of accident or risk of damage to
property. Do not mount snow chains.
Changing wheels/tires
General information
When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a
wheel does not always need to be changed
immediately when there is a loss of tire in-
flation pressure due to a flat tire.
If needed, the tools for changing wheels are
available as accessories from a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Safety information
DANGER
The vehicle jack is only provided for short-
term lifting of the vehicle for wheel
changes. Even if all safety measures are
observed, there is a risk of the raised vehi-
cle falling, if the vehicle jack tips over.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
When the vehicle is raised with the vehi-
cle jack, do not lie under the vehicle and
do not switch on the drive-ready state.
Seite 238
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
238
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
DANGER
Supports such as wooden blocks under the
vehicle jack reduce the capacity of the ve-
hicle jack to bear weight. They have the
potential to exert too much strain on the
vehicle jack, causing it to tip over and the
vehicle to fall. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Do not place supports under
the vehicle jack.
Warning
The jack, issued by the vehicle manufac-
turer, is provided in order to perform a
wheel change in the event of a breakdown.
The jack is not designed for frequent use;
for example, changing from summer to
winter tires. Using the jack frequently may
cause it to become jammed or damaged.
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage
to property. Only use the jack to attach an
emergency or spare wheel in the event of
a breakdown.
Warning
On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for ex-
ample snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack
can slip away. There is a risk of injury. If
possible, change the wheel on a flat, solid,
and slip-resistant surface.
Warning
The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting
the vehicle and for the jacking points on
the vehicle only. There is a risk of injury.
Do not lift any other vehicle or cargo using
the vehicle jack.
Warning
When the vehicle jack is not inserted into
the jacking point provided for this pur-
pose, the vehicle may be damaged or the
vehicle jack may slip when it is being
cranked up. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. When cranking up
the vehicle jack, ensure that it is inserted
in the jacking point next to the wheel
housing.
Warning
A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack
may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are
exerted on it. There is a risk of injury and
risk of damage to property. While the ve-
hicle is raised, do not exert lateral forces
on the vehicle or pull abruptly on the vehi-
cle. Have a stuck wheel removed by a deal-
er’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Securing the vehicle against rolling
General information
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to
additionally secure the vehicle against roll-
ing away when changing a wheel.
Seite 239
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
239
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
On a level surface
Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects
in front and behind the wheel that is diago-
nal to the wheel to be changed.
On a slight downhill gradient
If you need to change a wheel on a slight
downhill grade, place chocks and other suit-
able objects, for instance a rock, under the
wheels of both the front and rear axles
against the rolling direction.
Preparing the vehicle
– Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip
ground at a safe distance from traffic.
– Switch on the hazard warning system.
– Set the parking brake.
– Engage a gear or move the selector lever
to position P.
– As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,
have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out-
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
– Depending on the vehicle equipment,
get wheel change tools and, if necessary,
the emergency wheel from the vehicle.
– If necessary, set up a warning triangle
or portable hazard warning light at an
appropriate distance.
– Secure the vehicle additionally against
rolling.
– Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are
located at the marked positions.
Seite 240
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
240
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Jacking up the vehicle
Warning
Hands and fingers can be jammed when
using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of
injury. Comply with the described hand
position and do not change this position
while using the vehicle jack.
1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar-
row 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crank
or lever with your other hand, arrow 2.
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectan-
gular recess of the jacking point closest
to the wheel to be changed.
3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the
vehicle jack crank or lever clockwise.
4. Take your hand away from the vehicle
jack as soon as the vehicle jack is under
load and continue turning the vehicle
jack crank or lever with one hand.
5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot
stands vertically and at a right angle be-
neath the jacking point.
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot
stands vertically and perpendicularly be-
neath the jacking point after extending
the vehicle jack.
7. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle
jack is with the entire surface on the
Seite 241
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
241
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
ground and the relevant wheel is maxi-
mum 1.2 inches/3 cm above ground.
Mounting a wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only, as re-
quired.
1. Unscrew the lug bolts.
2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel
on and screw in at least two lug bolts in
a crosswise pattern until hand-tight.
If non-original light-alloy wheels of the
vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the
accompanying lug bolts may have to be
used as well.
4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts
and tighten all lug bolts well in a cross-
wise pattern.
5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counter-
clockwise to retract the vehicle jack and
lower the vehicle.
6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it se-
curely.
After the wheel change
1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The
tightening torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo
area, if necessary.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored
under the cargo floor panel because of
its size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next
opportunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are
tight with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the
nearest dealer's service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
Seite 242
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
242
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Engine compartment
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and
functions that are not necessarily available
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Overview
1 Filler neck for washer fluid
2 Vehicle identification number
3 Jump-starting, positive terminal
4 Jump-starting, negative terminal
5 Coolant reservoir
Seite 243
Engine compartment MOBILITY
243
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Hood
Safety information
Warning
Improperly executed work in the engine
compartment can damage vehicle compo-
nents and impair vehicle functions. There
is a risk of an accident and damage to
property. Have work in the engine com-
partment performed by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
Warning
The engine compartment accommodates
moving components. Certain components
in the engine compartment can also move
with the vehicle switched off, for instance
the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury.
Do not reach into the area of moving parts.
Keep articles of clothing and hair away
from moving parts.
Warning
There are protruding parts, for instance
locking hook, on the inside of the hood.
There is a risk of injury. If the hood is
open, pay attention to protruding parts
and keep clear of these areas.
Warning
An incorrectly locked hood can open while
driving and restrict visibility. There is a
risk of accident. Stop immediately and cor-
rectly close the hood.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when opening
and closing the hood. There is a risk of in-
jury. Make sure that the area of movement
of the hood is clear during opening and
closing.
NOTICE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed when
the hood is opened. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening
the hood.
NOTICE
When the hood is closed, it must engage
on both sides. Pressing again can damage
the hood. There is a risk of damage to
property. Open the hood again and then
close it energetically. Avoid pressing
again.
Opening the hood
1. Pull lever, arrow 1.
Hood is unlocked.
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever
again, arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
Seite 244
MOBILITY Engine compartment
244
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Indicator/warning lights
When the hood is opened, a Check Control
message is displayed.
Closing the hood
Energetically close the hood from approx.
20 in/50 cm.
The hood must engage on both sides.
Seite 245
Engine compartment MOBILITY
245
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Coolant
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and
functions that are not necessarily available
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
General information
Coolant consists of water and additives.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for the vehicle. Do not mix addi-
tives of different colors. Observe the water -
additive mixing ratio of 50:50. Information
about suitable additives is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Safety information
Warning
With the drive system hot and the cooling
system open, coolant can escape and lead
to scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only
open the cooling system with the drive
system cooled down.
Warning
Additives are harmful and incorrect addi-
tives can damage the drive system. There
is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
property. Do not allow additives to come
into contact with skin, eyes or articles of
clothing. Use suitable additives only.
NOTICE
Loss of coolant may damage the drive sys-
tem. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that there is sufficient coolant
in the reservoir at all times. Always have
coolant added by a dealer's service center
or another qualified service center or re-
pair shop.
Coolant level
Checking
There are yellow Min and Max marks in the
coolant reservoir.
1. Allow the drive system to cool down.
2. Open the hood, refer to page 244.
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir
slightly counterclockwise to allow any
Seite 246
MOBILITY Coolant
246
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
excess pressure to dissipate, then open
it.
4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
5. The coolant level is correct if it lies be-
tween the minimum and maximum
marks in the filler neck.
6. Close the lid.
When the coolant level is low, check the
cooling system and add coolant. Have the
cooling system checked and coolant added
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environ-
mental protection regulations when
disposing of coolant and coolant ad-
ditives.
Seite 247
Coolant MOBILITY
247
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and
functions that are not necessarily available
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
MINI maintenance system
The maintenance system provides service
notifications and thereby provides support
in maintaining road safety and the opera-
tional reliability of the vehicle.
In some cases, scopes and intervals of the
maintenance system may vary according to
the country version. Replacement work,
spare parts, fuels and lubricants, and wear
materials are calculated separately. Further
information is available from a dealer's serv-
ice center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Safety information
DANGER
Improperly performed work, in particular
maintenance and repair on the high-volt-
age system, can lead to electric shock.
There is a risk of injury, fire and danger to
life.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends that the work on the vehicle, in par-
ticular maintenance and repair, be per-
formed by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Condition Based Service CBS
Concept
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac-
count the driving conditions of the vehicle.
CBS uses these to calculate the need for
maintenance.
The system makes it possible to adapt the
amount of maintenance corresponding to
your user profile.
General information
Information on service notifications, refer
to page 126, can be displayed on the Control
Display.
Service data in the vehicle key
Information on the service notifications is
continuously stored in the vehicle key. The
service center can read this data out and
suggest a maintenance scope for the vehi-
cle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the ve-
hicle key with which the vehicle was driven
most recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle
battery was disconnected are not taken into
account.
Seite 248
MOBILITY Maintenance
248
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Have a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop up-
date the time-dependent maintenance pro-
cedures, such as checking brake fluid and
changing the microfilter/activated-charcoal
filter.
Maintenance Manual and
Service and Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet for US models
and Warranty and Service
Guide Booklet for Canadian
models
Please consult your Maintenance Manual
and Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
for additional information on the perform-
ance of service and maintenance work.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends that maintenance and repair be per-
formed by a service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop. Records
of regular maintenance and repair work
should be retained.
Socket for OBD Onboard Diag-
nosis
General information
Devices connected to the OBD socket trig-
ger the alarm system when the vehicle is
locked. Remove any devices connected at
the OBD socket before locking the vehicle.
Safety information
NOTICE
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an in-
tricate component intended to be used in
conjunction with specialized equipment to
check the vehicle’s primary emissions sys-
tem. Improper use of the socket for On-
board Diagnosis, or contact with the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis for other
than its intended purpose, can cause vehi-
cle malfunctions and creates risks of per-
sonal and property damage. Given the fore-
going, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to
a dealer's service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop or other
persons that have the specialized training
and equipment for purposes of properly
utilizing the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side
for checking the primary components in the
vehicle's emissions.
Seite 249
Maintenance MOBILITY
249
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and
functions that are not necessarily available
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Vehicle tool kit
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
onboard vehicle tool kit is located on the
right side under the cargo floor panel or in a
bag on the right side of the cargo area.
After use, secure the bag with the onboard
vehicle tool kit on a lashing eye again.
Wiper blades
Safety information
NOTICE
The window may sustain damage if the
wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade
installed. There is a risk of damage to
property. Hold the wiper firmly when
changing the wiper blade. Do not fold or
switch on the wiper without a wiper blade
installed.
NOTICE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed when
the hood is opened. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening
the hood.
Replacing the front wiper blades
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the
wiper arms.
2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
3. Open the wiper blade lock, arrow.
Seite 250
MOBILITY Replacing components
250
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
4. Pull the wiper blade down out of the
holder on the wiper arm, arrow 1.
5. Pull the wiper blade free from the holder
of the wiper arm, arrow 2.
6. Insert and latch a new wiper blade in re-
verse order.
7. Fold down the wiper arm.
Replacing the rear wiper blade
1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
2. Turn the wiper blade all the way back.
3. Push the wiper blade out of the fasten-
ing by continuing to turn it all the way.
4. Insert the new wiper blade by following
the steps in reverse order. The wiper
blade must engage audibly.
5. Fold down the wiper arm.
Light and bulb replacement
General information
Lights and bulbs
Lights and bulbs make an essential contri-
bution to vehicle safety.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recom-
mends that you have appropriate work per-
formed by a dealer’s service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop
if you are unfamiliar with it or if it has not
been described here.
A spare light box is available from a dealer's
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Follow the safety information, refer to
page 251.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Some items of equipment use light-emitting
diodes installed behind a cover as a light
source. These light-emitting diodes are re-
lated to conventional lasers and are offi-
cially designated as Class 1 light-emitting
diodes.
Follow the safety information, refer to
page 251.
Safety information
Lights and bulbs
Warning
Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con-
tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There
is a risk of injury. Only change bulbs after
they have cooled off.
Seite 251
Replacing components MOBILITY
251
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Warning
Work on switched-on lighting systems can
cause short circuits. There is a risk of in-
jury or risk of damage to property. When
working on the lighting system, switch off
the lights in question. If necessary, heed
the bulb manufacturer's instructions.
NOTICE
Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not hold new bulbs with your bare hands.
Use a clean cloth or something similar, or
hold the bulb by its base.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Warning
Intensive brightness can irritate or dam-
age the retina of the eye. There is a risk of
injury. Do not look directly into the head-
lights or other light sources. Do not re-
move the LED covers.
Headlight glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the
headlight glass in cool or humid weather.
When driving with the lights switched on,
the condensation evaporates after a short
time. The headlight glass does not need to
be changed.
If despite driving with the headlights
switched on, increasing humidity forms, for
instance water droplets in the light, have
the headlights checked.
Headlight setting
The headlight adjustments can be affected
by changing lights and bulbs. After the
headlight adjustment was changed, have it
checked and, if necessary, corrected by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
LED front lights, bulb replacement
All lights feature LED technology.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a deal-
er's service center or another qualified serv-
ice center or repair shop.
LED front fog lights
These front fog lights are made using LED
technology. In the case of a malfunction,
contact a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Tail lights, bulb replacement
Overview
1 Side tail lights
2 Rear fog lights
3 License plate light
4 Center brake light
Seite 252
MOBILITY Replacing components
252
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Side tail lights
1 Tail lights
2 Turn signals/brake lights
3 Turn signals/brake lights
4 Reversing lights
Side tail lights
Follow the general instructions on lights
and bulbs, refer to page 251.
Bulb, reversing lights: P21W.
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Remove left or right cover.
3. Turn the bulb holder for the reversing
light, arrow, counterclockwise and re-
move it.
4. Remove the bulb holder from the open-
ing.
5. Press the nonworking bulb gently into
the socket, turn counterclockwise and
remove.
6. Proceed in the reverse order to insert
the new bulb and attach the bulb holder.
Make sure that the bulb holder engages
in all fasteners.
Central brake light and license plate
lights
Follow the general instructions on lights
and bulbs, refer to page 251.
The lights feature LED technology. In the
case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Side turn signal, bulb replacement
Follow the general instructions on lights
and bulbs, refer to page 251.
Seite 253
Replacing components MOBILITY
253
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
5-watt bulb, WY5W.
1. Open the hood. The covers of the side
turn signal lights are on the left and
right next to the hinges of the hood.
2. Loosen the nuts of the cover by hand or
with the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer
to page 250, and remove the cover.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
and remove.
4. Replace the bulb.
5. To insert the new bulb, proceed in re-
verse order of removal.
Vehicle battery
The vehicle battery has 12 volts. The bat-
tery supplies the onboard electronics with
energy.
For information about the high-voltage sys-
tem, refer to page 218.
General information
The battery is maintenance-free.
More information about the battery can be
requested from a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Safety information
Warning
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible
can damage vehicle systems and impair
vehicle functions. There is a risk of an ac-
cident and damage to property. Only vehi-
cle batteries that are compatible with your
vehicle type should be installed in your ve-
hicle. Information on compatible vehicle
batteries is available at your dealer’s serv-
ice center.
Register the battery to the vehicle
The manufacturer of the vehicle recom-
mends that you have a service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop
register the vehicle battery to the vehicle
after the battery has been replaced. Once
the battery has been registered again, all
comfort features will be available without
restriction and any Check Control messages
displayed which relate to comfort features
will disappear.
Seite 254
MOBILITY Replacing components
254
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Charging the battery
General information
For charging a discharged battery, refer to
page 226.
Safety information
NOTICE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board
network can be overloaded or damaged.
There is a risk of damage to property. Only
connect battery chargers for the vehicle
battery to the starting aid terminals in the
engine compartment.
Power failure
After a power loss, some equipment needs
to be newly initialized or individual settings
updated, for example:
– Memory function: store the positions
again.
– Time: update.
– Date: update.
– Glass sunroof: initialize the system.
Disposing of old batteries
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair
shop or take them to a collection point.
Maintain the filled battery in an upright po-
sition for transport and storage. Secure the
battery so that it does not tip over during
transport.
Fuses
Safety information
Warning
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
electrical lines and components. There is a
risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a
blown fuse. Do not replace a nonworking
fuse with a substitute of another color or
amperage rating.
Accessing the fuses
The fuses are located in the glove compart-
ment.
1. Open the glove compartment.
2. Swing the cover down, arrow.
Information on the fuse types and locations,
as well as the positions of any other fuse
boxes, is available on the Internet:
www.mini.com/fusecard.
Where applicable, information on the fuse
types and locations is also found on a sepa-
rate sheet in the fuse box.
Replacing fuses
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have a dealer's service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop
replace the fuses.
Seite 255
Replacing components MOBILITY
255
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and
functions that are not necessarily available
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located above the Control Dis-
play.
The red light in the button flashes when the
hazard warning flashers are activated.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located in the tail-
gate. To remove, loosen the brackets.
First-aid kit
General information
Some of the articles have a limited service
life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents
regularly and replace any expired items
promptly.
Storage
The first-aid kit is located in the cargo area.
MINI Roadside Assistance
Concept
MINI Roadside Assistance can be contacted
if assistance is needed in the event of a
breakdown.
Seite 256
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
256
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
General information
In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve-
hicle's condition is sent to the vehicle man-
ufacturer.
There are various ways of making contact.
– Via a Check Control message, refer to
page 121.
– Calling with a mobile phone.
Requirements
– Active MINI Connected contract or
equipment version with intelligent
emergency call.
– Cellular network reception.
– Standby state is switched on.
Starting
If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices,
support is offered through Teleservice Diag-
nosis.
Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "MINI Connected"
2. "MINI Assist"
3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"
The contact to the Roadside Assistance
of the manufacture is established.
A telephone number is displayed, if
needed. Select to dial the telephone
number on a connected mobile phone.
Teleservice Diagnosis
Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that is
important for vehicle diagnosis. This data is
transmitted automatically.
Teleservice Help
Depending on the country, the Teleservice
Help enables a more in-depth diagnosis of
the vehicle via wireless transmission.
You can launch Teleservice Help by re-
questing it through the Service Specialist.
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Control Display is switched on.
4. Confirm Teleservice Help.
The driving ability of the vehicle can be re-
stored for specific functions.
If this is not possible, further measures will
be initiated, for instance Roadside Assis-
tance will be informed.
Emergency Request
Intelligent emergency call
Concept
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re-
quest can be triggered automatically by the
system or manually.
General information
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
The Intelligent Assist system establishes a
connection with the MINI Response Center.
For technical reasons, the Emergency Re-
quest cannot be guaranteed under unfavora-
ble conditions.
Seite 257
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
257
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Overview
SOS button in the roofliner
Functional requirements
– Standby state is switched on.
– The Assist system is functional.
– If the vehicle is equipped with intelli-
gent emergency call: the SIM card
integrated in the vehicle has been acti-
vated.
Automatic triggering
Under certain conditions, for instance if the
airbags trigger, an Emergency Request is
automatically initiated immediately after an
accident of corresponding severity. Auto-
matic Collision Notification is not affected
by pressing the SOS button.
Manual triggering
1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED at
the button lights up green.
– The LED is illuminated green when an
Emergency Request has been initiated.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehi-
cle until the voice connection has been
established.
– The LED flashes green when a connec-
tion to the MINI Response Center has
been established.
The MINI Response Center then makes
contact with you and takes further steps
to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
MINI Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circum-
stances.
For this purpose, data that serves to de-
termine the necessary rescue measures,
for instance the current position of the
vehicle when it can be determined, is
transmitted to the MINI Response Cen-
ter.
If you can no longer hear the MINI Re-
sponse Center through the loudspeakers,
the hands-free system, for instance, may
be broken. However, the MINI Response
Center may still be able to hear you.
The MINI Response Center ends the Emer-
gency Request.
Jump-starting
General information
Have only a dealer’s service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop
perform the jump start.
Safety information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is a risk of inju-
ries or danger to life. Do not touch any
components that are under voltage.
Seite 258
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
258
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Towing
Transporting the vehicle
General information
The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
Safety information
NOTICE
The vehicle can be damaged when towing
the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There
is a risk of damage to property. The vehi-
cle should only be transported on a loading
platform.
Pushing the vehicle
To remove a broken-down vehicle from the
danger area, push it for a short distance at a
speed of no more than 6 mph/10 km/h.
For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
page 103.
Tow truck
The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform.
NOTICE
The vehicle can become damaged when
lifting and securing it.
There is a risk of damage to property.
– Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
– Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its
tow fitting, body parts, or suspension
parts.
Towing other vehicles
General information
Switch on the hazard warning system, de-
pending on local regulations.
If the electrical system has failed, clearly
identify the vehicle being towed by placing
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win-
dow.
Safety information
Warning
If the approved gross vehicle weight of the
towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle
to be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or
it will not be possible to control the vehi-
cle's response. There is a risk of accident.
Make sure that the gross vehicle weight of
the towing vehicle is heavier than the ve-
hicle to be towed.
NOTICE
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in-
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts
can occur. There is a risk of damage to
property. Correctly attach the tow bar or
tow rope to the tow fitting.
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mount-
ing the tow bar at an offset angle, please fol-
low the following:
Seite 259
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
259
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
– Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners.
– The tow bar will generate lateral forces
if it is secured with an offset.
Tow rope
Observe the following notes when using the
tow rope:
– Use nylon ropes or straps, which will en-
able the vehicle to be towed without
jerking.
– Make sure the tow rope is not twisted
when fastening.
– Check the fastening of the tow fitting
and tow rope in regular intervals.
– Do not exceed a towing speed of
30 mph/50 km/h.
– Do not exceed a towing distance of
3 miles/5 km.
– When starting to tow the vehicle, make
sure that the tow rope is taut.
Tow fitting
General information
The screw-in tow fitting should always be
carried in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the
front or rear of the vehicle.
The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool
kit, refer to page 250, are together in the
cargo area.
Use of the tow fitting:
– Use only the tow fitting provided with
the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
– Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
roads only.
– Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting,
for instance do not lift the vehicle by the
tow fitting.
– Check the fastening of the tow fitting in
regular intervals.
Safety information
NOTICE
If the tow fitting is not used as intended,
there may be damage to the vehicle or to
the tow fitting. There is a risk of damage
to property. Follow the notes on using the
tow fitting.
Screw thread for tow fitting
Threaded holes for the tow fitting are lo-
cated in the front and rear of the vehicle on
the right side with respect to the direction
of travel.
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover
to push it out.
Seite 260
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
260
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
What to do after an accident
Safety information
Warning
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is a risk of inju-
ries or danger to life. After an accident, do
not touch any high-voltage components
such as orange colored high-voltage cables
or parts that are in contact with exposed
high-voltage cables.
Warning
Fluids in the high-voltage battery are cor-
rosive. There is a risk of injury. Do not
touch fluids escaping from the high-volt-
age battery.
General information
After an accident, comply with the follow-
ing safety precautions with regard to the
high-voltage system:
– Secure the crash site.
– Immediately notify rescue forces, police,
or firefighters of the fact that your vehi-
cle is equipped with a high-voltage sys-
tem.
– Engage selector lever position P, set the
parking brake, and switch off the
standby state and drive-ready state.
– Lock the vehicle after exiting.
– Do not inhale any gases escaping from
the high-voltage battery; if needed,
maintain a safe distance from the vehi-
cle.
Seite 261
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
261
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Care
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and
functions that are not necessarily available
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
Washing the vehicle
General information
Regularly remove foreign objects such as
leaves in the area below the windshield
when the hood is raised.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly
in winter. Intense soiling and road salt can
damage the vehicle.
Safety information
Warning
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. High voltage is present
at the charging connection. There is a risk
of injury or danger to life.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends that work on the charging connec-
tion, for instance cleaning, be performed
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
NOTICE
When washing, water can get into the
open charging socket. There is a risk of
damage to property. Close the charging
socket flap while washing.
Steam jets or high-pressure
washers
Safety information
NOTICE
When cleaning with high-pressure wash-
ers, components can be damaged due to
the pressure or temperatures being too
high. There is a risk of damage to property.
Maintain sufficient distance and do not
spray too long continuously. Follow the
operating instructions for the high-pres-
sure washer.
Distances and temperature
– Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
– Minimum distance from sensors, cam-
eras, seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
– Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
31.5 in/80 cm.
– Minimum distance from the charging
socket flap: 31.5 in/80 cm.
Seite 262
MOBILITY Care
262
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Automatic vehicle washes
Safety information
NOTICE
Water can penetrate in the windshield
area due to high-pressure washers. There
is a risk of damage to property. Do not
drive into high-pressure car wash systems.
NOTICE
Improper use of automatic washing sys-
tems or car washes can cause damage to
the vehicle. There is a risk of damage to
property. Follow the following instruc-
tions:
– Give preference to cloth car washes
or those that use soft brushes in or-
der to avoid paint damage.
– Do not drive through a car wash with
guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm to
avoid damage to the chassis.
– Observe the tire width of the guide
rail to avoid damage to tires and rims.
– Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid dam-
age to the exterior mirrors.
– Unscrew the rod antenna to avoid the
rod antenna breaking off.
– Deactivate the wiper and, if neces-
sary, rain sensor to avoid damage to
the wiper system.
Driving into a car wash
In car washes, the vehicle must be able to
roll freely.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
page 101.
Some car washes do not permit persons in
the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked
from the outside when in selector lever po-
sition N. A signal is sounded when an at-
tempt is made to lock the vehicle.
Driving out of a car wash
Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car.
For activating drive-ready state, refer to
page 101.
Headlights
Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not
use abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for in-
stance from insects, with shampoo and
wash off with water.
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an
ice scraper.
After washing the vehicle
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking ac-
tion can be reduced. The heat generated
during braking dries brake discs and brake
pads and protects them against corrosion.
Completely remove all residues on the win-
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
wiper blade wear.
Vehicle care
Vehicle care products
General information
MINI recommends using vehicle care and
cleaning products from MINI. Suitable care
products are available from a dealer’s serv-
ice center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Seite 263
Care MOBILITY
263
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Safety information
Warning
Cleansers can contain substances that are
dangerous and harmful to your health.
There is a risk of injury. When cleaning
the interior, open the doors or windows.
Only use products intended for cleaning
vehicles. Follow the instructions on the
container.
Vehicle paint
General information
Regular care contributes to driving safety
and value retention. Environmental influen-
ces in areas with elevated air pollution or
natural contaminants, such as tree resin or
pollen can affect the vehicle's paintwork.
Tailor the frequency and extent of your ve-
hicle care to these influences.
Aggressive substances such as oil, grease or
bird droppings, must be removed immedi-
ately to prevent the finish from being al-
tered or discolored.
Matte finish
Only use cleaning and care products suita-
ble for vehicles with matte finish.
Leather care
Remove dust from the leather regularly, us-
ing a cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to in-
creased wear and premature degradation of
the leather surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, clean leather and provide leather
care roughly every two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently
because soiling on such surfaces is substan-
tially more visible.
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt
and grease will gradually break down the
protective layer of the leather surface.
Upholstery material care
General information
Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a
vacuum cleaner.
If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with
beverage stains, use a soft sponge or micro-
fiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams us-
ing large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing
the material vigorously.
Safety information
NOTICE
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of
clothing can damage the seat covers.
There is a risk of damage to property. En-
sure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.
Caring for special components
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to
9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or
steam jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the
manufacturer's instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning
agents can destroy the protective layer of
adjacent components, such as the brake
disc.
After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to
dry them. The heat generated during brak-
Seite 264
MOBILITY Care
264
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
ing dries brake discs and brake pads and
protects them against corrosion.
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the ra-
diator grille or door handles with plenty of
water, possibly with shampoo added, partic-
ularly when they have been exposed to road
salt.
Rubber components
Environmental influences can cause surface
soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss.
Use only water and suitable cleaning agents
for cleaning.
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rub-
ber care agents at regular intervals. When
cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sili-
con-containing vehicle care products in or-
der to avoid damage or noises.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood com-
ponents only with a moist rag. Then dry
with a soft cloth.
Plastic components
NOTICE
Cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents,
such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage
plastic parts. There is a risk of damage to
property. Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if
needed.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if
needed.
Do not soak the roofliner.
Safety belts
Warning
Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety
belt webbing. Missing protective effect of
the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries
or danger to life. Use only a mild soapy sol-
ution for cleaning the safety belts.
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action
and thus have a negative impact on safety.
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the
safety belts clipped into their buckles.
Safety belts should only be allowed to re-
tract if they are dry.
Carpets and floor mats
Warning
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed
pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow ob-
jects in the vehicle such that they are se-
cured and cannot enter into the driver's
floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable
for the vehicle and can be safely attached
to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats
and do not layer several floor mats. Make
sure that there is sufficient clearance for
the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are
securely fastened again after they were re-
moved, for instance for cleaning.
Floor mats can be removed from the car's
interior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with
a microfiber cloth and water or a textile
cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet,
rub back and forth in the direction of travel
only.
Seite 265
Care MOBILITY
265
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
cloth moistened with a small amount of
glass detergent.
Displays/Screens/Projection lenses
NOTICE
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of
any kind can damage the surface of dis-
plays and screens. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Clean with a clean, anti-
static microfiber cloth.
NOTICE
The surface of displays can be damaged
with improper cleaning. There is a risk of
damage to property. Avoid pressure that is
too high and do not use any scratching
materials.
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber
cloth.
For stubborn soiling on the projection lens
of the Head-up Display, dampen the micro-
fiber cloth with alcohol. Projection lens, re-
fer to page 132.
Long idle times and long-term
vehicle storage
Concept
For idle phases that last several weeks, park
the vehicle with the high-voltage battery
fully charged, if possible.
Do not park the vehicle for longer than
14 days if the electric range is exhausted.
With storage times of up to three months, if
possible plug the vehicle into a compatible
power source or park it with the high-volt-
age battery as fully charged as possible.
General information
Your dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop can
advise you on what to consider when stor-
ing the vehicle for longer than three
months.
Safety information
NOTICE
The high-voltage battery can be damaged
if left uncharged or with low charge for ex-
tended periods. There is a risk of damage
to property. Before storing the vehicle for
an extended period, ensure that the high-
voltage battery is fully charged. During the
idle period, connect the vehicle to a charg-
ing station at a compatible charging loca-
tion. If necessary, the high-voltage battery
will be charged automatically. Make sure
that charging is carried out. Regularly
check the charge state.
Do not allow the vehicle to sit idle for lon-
ger than four weeks with a charge state
below approx. 80 %.
Seite 266
MOBILITY Care
266
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Seite 267
Care MOBILITY
267
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Technical data
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and
functions that are not necessarily available
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be
observed.
General information
The technical data and specifications in the
Owner's Manual are used as guidance val-
ues. The vehicle-specific data can deviate
from this, for instance due to the selected
special equipment, country version or coun-
try-specific measurement method. Detailed
values can be found in the approval docu-
ments, on labels on the vehicle or can be ob-
tained from a dealer’s service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the
model version, equipment or country-spe-
cific measurement method.
The specified heights do not take into ac-
count attached parts, for instance a roof an-
tenna, roof racks or spoiler. The heights can
deviate, for instance due to the selected
special equipment, tires, load and chassis
version.
MINI Cooper SE
Width with mirrors in/mm 75.9/1,928
Width without mirrors in/mm 68/1,727
Height in/mm 56.4/1,432
Length in/mm 151.4/3,845
Wheelbase in/mm 98.2/2,495
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 35.1/10.7
Seite 268
REFERENCE Technical data
268
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Weights
MINI Cooper SE
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 3,913/1,775
Load lbs/kg 728/330
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,172/985
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 1,918/870
Seite 269
Technical data REFERENCE
269
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the
vehicle are listed here.
Updates made after the edito-
rial deadline
The following chapters were updated in the
printed version of the Owner's Manual after
the editorial deadline for the Integrated
Owner's Manual in the vehicle had closed:
– Notes: notes: own safety: maintenance.
– Driving tips: observe when driving: driv-
ing on a race track.
– Mobility: engine oil: topping up the en-
gine oil.
– Mobility: preventive maintenance: MINI
maintenance system.
– Mobility: preventive maintenance: Con-
dition Based Service CBS.
– Mobility: preventive maintenance: Main-
tenance Manual and Service and War-
ranty Information Booklet for US models
and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet
for Canadian models.
Seite 270
REFERENCE Appendix
270
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Seite 271
Appendix REFERENCE
271
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS Antilock Braking System 162
Accelerator pedal positions 105
Accessories and parts 8
Accident, what to do 261
Acoustic Pedestrian Protection 106
AC quick charging cable, see Level 2 charg-
ing cable 220
Activated-charcoal filter 184
Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 152
Active Voice Recognition 44
Adjusting menu contents, Central Informa-
tion Display (CID) 40
Adjustments, steering wheel 94
Advance climate control, see Stationary cli-
mate control 184
Airbags 141
Airbags, indicator and warning light 143
Air circulation, see Recirculated-air
mode 183
Air conditioning, climate 182
Air distribution, manual 183
Air drying, see Air conditioning 182
Air flow, automatic climate control 183
Air pressure, tires 227
Air vents, see Ventilation 184
Alarm system 79
Alarm triggering 79
Alarm, unintentional 80
All-season tires, see Winter tires 233
Amazon Alexa Car Integration 46
Antifreeze, washer fluid 117
Antilock Braking System ABS 162
Anti-slip control, see DSC 162
Approach control warning with city light
braking function 153
Approved axle load 269
Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Arrival time 130
Artificial engine noise, see Acoustic Pedes-
trian Protection 106
Ash tray 192
Assistance when driving off 165
Assistance with breakdown 256
Audio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication 6
AUTO intensity 183
Automatic climate control 181
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mir-
ror 93
Automatic deactivation, front-seat passen-
ger airbags 143
Automatic deactivation of the high-voltage
system 65
Automatic headlight control 136
Automatic locking 78
Automatic unlocking 78
Automatic vehicle wash 263
AUTO program, automatic climate con-
trol 182
AUTO program, intensity 183
Auto washing 262
Average consumption 129
Average speed 129
Axle loads, weights 269
B
Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 86
Backrest, seats 85
Band-aids, see First-aid kit 256
Battery, charge state indicator 120
Battery, disposing of 255
Battery, vehicle 254
Being towed, see Towing 259
Belts, safety belts 87
Beverage holder, cup holder 200
Bluetooth connection 53
Seite 272
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
272
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Bottle holder, see Cup holder 200
Brake assistant 162
Brake discs, break-in 208
Brake pads, break-in 208
Braking, information 209
Breakdown assistance 256
Breakdown, Flat Tire Monitor TPM 150
Breaking in 208
Break recommendation, see Fatigue
alert 159
Brightness of Control Display 50
Bulb replacement 251
Bulb replacement, front 252
Bulb replacement, rear 252
Bulb replacement, side 253
Bulbs and lights 251
Button, SOS 257
Button, Start/Stop 100
Bypassing, see Jump-starting 258
C
California Proposition 65 Warning 9
Camera-based assistance systems, see Intel-
ligent Safety 152
Camera lenses, care 266
Camera, rearview camera 173
Can holder, see Cup holder 200
Care, displays 266
Care, light-alloy wheels 264
Care, vehicle 263
Care, washing the vehicle 262
Cargo area 201
Cargo area, adapting size 205
Cargo area, enlarging 203
Cargo area lid 74
Cargo area, loading 201
Cargo area, storage compartments 203
Cargo cover 202
Cargo position, rear seat backrest 203
Cargo, stowing and securing 201
Cargo straps 202
Carpet, care 265
CBS Condition Based Service 248
Cell phone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
Center armrest 199
Center console 34
Central Information Display (CID) 36
Central Information Display (CID), see Con-
trol Display 38
Central instrument cluster, LED ring 131
Central locking system, unlocking, from in-
side 71
Central screen, see Control Display 38
Changes, technical, see For Your Own
Safety 8
Changing parts 250
Changing wheels 238
Changing, wheels and tires 231
Charge state indicator of the high-voltage
battery 120
Charging battery, see Vehicle charging 218
Charging cable, storing, see Storage 221
Charging screen 119
Charging, see Charging the vehicle 218
Charging, see Vehicle charging 218
Charging status, see Display of the charging
status 223
Charging the vehicle 218
Charging the vehicle, see Vehicle charg-
ing 218
Charging tray for smartphones, see Wire-
less charging tray 194
Chassis number, see Vehicle identification
number 13
Check Control 121
Children, seating position 95
Children, transporting safely 95
Child restraint system 95
Child restraint system LATCH 98
Child restraint systems, mounting 96
Child seat, mounting 96
Child seats 95
Chrome parts, care 265
Cigarette lighter 192
Cleaning, displays 266
Clearance, water 209
Climate control 181
Clothes hooks 200
Coasting 106
Combination switch, see Turn signals 109
Seite 273
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
273
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Combi switch, see Wiper system 109, 113
Comfort Access 72
Comfort entry 67
Compartments in the doors 199
Compass 190
Compatible devices, see Suitable devi-
ces 53
Compressor 234
Computer, see Onboard Computer 129
Condensation on windows 184
Condensation under the vehicle 210
Condition Based Service CBS 248
Configuring driving program 165
Confirmation signal 79
Connecting device 52
Connecting electrical devices, see Sock-
ets 193
Connections 52
Consumption, see Average consump-
tion 129
Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Contact with water, high-voltage system 65
Continued driving with a flat tire 148, 151
Control Display 38
Controller 38
Control systems, driving stability 162
Convenient closing 68
Convenient opening 67
Coolant 246
Cooling, maximum 182
Cooling system 246
Cornering light 137
Corrosion on brake discs 210
Cosmetic mirror 192
Coupling, see Pairing 52
Courtesy lights during unlocking 67
Courtesy lights with the vehicle locked 68
Cruise control 167
Cruise control without distance control, see
Cruise control 167
Cup holder 200
Customer service, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
tion 6
D
Damage, tires 231
Dashboard 192
Data memory 10
Data protection, settings 51
Data, technical 268
Date 49
Date, display 125
Daytime pedestrian collision mitiga-
tion 157
Daytime running lights 137
DCC, see Cruise control 167
Decorative trim 192
Defrosting, see Windows, defrosting 184
Deleting personal data 51
Deletion of personal data 51
Departure times, stationary climate con-
trol 185
Destination distance 130
Device list 52
Digital clock 125
Digital compass 190
Dimensions 268
Dimmable exterior mirrors 92
Dimmable interior mirror 93
Direction indicator, see Turn signals 109
Display, date 125
Display, electronic, instrument cluster 119
Display for performance and energy recov-
ery 120
Display, GREEN Mode 214
Display, iDrive 36
Display lighting, see Instrument light-
ing 139
Displays 118
Displays, care 266
Displays, eDRIVE system 120
Displays, high-voltage system 120
Disposal, coolant 247
Disposal, vehicle battery 255
Distance control, see PDC 169
Distance to destination 130
Divided screen view, split screen 37
Drive display 120
Drive-off assistant 165
Seite 274
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
274
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Drive-off assistant, see DSC 162
Driver assistance, see Intelligent
Safety 152
Drive-ready state in detail 101
Drive-ready state, switching off 104
Drive-ready state, switching on 101
Driver Fatigue Detector 159
Driver profiles 75
Driver profiles, exporting profiles 77
Driver profiles, importing profiles 77
Driving Dynamics Control, see MINI Driv-
ing Modes switch 164
Driving in detail 104
Driving instructions, breaking in 208
Driving instructions, eDRIVE drive sys-
tem 213
Driving mode, GREEN 214
Driving mode, GREEN Driving style analy-
sis 216
Driving modes 164
Driving notes, general 208
Driving notes, things to remember when
driving 208
Driving on racetracks 211
Driving, see Drive-ready state in detail 101
Driving stability control systems 162
Driving, Start/Stop button 100
Driving style analysis 216
Driving through water 209
Driving tip, GREEN tip 215
Driving tips 208
DSC Dynamic Stability Control 162
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 163
DVD, video, see Owner's Handbook for Nav-
igation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Dynamic Stability Control DSC 162
Dynamic Traction Control DTC 163
E
eDRIVE drive system, driving instruc-
tions 213
eDRIVE, electric driving, see MINI
eDRIVE 62
eDrive system, at a glance 0
eDRIVE system, displays 120
Electric driving 104
Electric driving, see MINI eDRIVE 62
Electric range 125
Electronic displays, instrument cluster 119
Electronic Stability Program ESP, see
DSC 162
E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Emergency Request 257
Emergency service, see MINI Roadside As-
sistance 256
Emergency unlocking, transmission
lock 104
Energy recovery, button 106
Energy recovery, displaying 120
Energy recovery, driving stability control
systems 162
Engine compartment 243
Engine compartment, working in 244
Engine noise, artificial, see Acoustic Pedes-
trian Protection 106
Entering a destination, see Owner's Hand-
book for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-
munication 6
Entering an address, navigation, see Own-
er's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment
and Communication 6
Entering a vehicle wash 263
Entertainment, see Owner's Manual for Nav-
igation, Entertainment and Communica-
tion 6
Equipment, interior 187
Error displays, see Check Control 121
ESP Electronic Stability Program, see
DSC 162
Exchanging, wheels and tires 231
Exiting a vehicle wash 263
Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Moni-
tor 93
Exterior mirror, automatic dimming fea-
ture 92
Exterior mirrors 92
Exterior mirrors, malfunction 92
External temperature display 125
External temperature warning 125
Eyes for securing cargo 202
Seite 275
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
275
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
F
Failure message, see Check Control 121
False alarm, see Unintentional alarm 80
Fan, see Air flow 183
Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 87
Fatigue alert 159
Filter, see Microfilter/activated-charcoal fil-
ter 184
Fine wood, care 265
First-aid kit 256
Fish, MINIMALISM display 216
Flat tire, changing wheels 238
Flat Tire Monitor TPM 150
Flat tire, repairing 234
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 145
Flat tire, warning light 146, 150
Flooding, driving through 209
Floor carpet, care 265
Floor mats, care 265
Fold-away position, windshield wip-
ers 112, 116
Foot brake 209
For Your Own Safety 8
Front airbags 141
Front fog lights 138
Front fog lights, LED, bulb replace-
ment 252
Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic de-
activation 143
Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator
light 144
Front seats 85
Fuse 255
G
Garage door opener, see Integrated Univer-
sal Remote Control 187
General driving notes 208
General settings 48
Glare shield 192
Glass sunroof, initialize the system 84
Glass sunroof, see Panoramic glass sun-
roof 82
Glove compartment 198
GPS geolocation, vehicle position 49
GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
tion 6
GREEN+ - program, driving dynamics 165
GREEN Mode 214
GREEN - program, driving dynamics 164
GREEN tip, driving tip 215
Gross vehicle weight, approved 269
Ground clearance 211
H
Handbrake, see Parking brake 107
Hand-held transmitter, alternating
code 188
Hands-free device, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi-
cation 6
Hazard warning flashers 256
Head airbag 142
Headlight control, automatic 136
Headlight flasher 109
Headlight glass 252
Headlights, care 263
Head restraints and seats 85
Head restraints, front 89
Head restraints, rear 90
Head-up Display 132
Head-up Display, standard view 132
Heavy cargo, stowing cargo 201
High-beam Assistant 137
High beams 109
High beams/low beams, see High-beam As-
sistant 137
High-voltage battery, charge state indica-
tor 120
High-voltage battery, discharge 214
High-voltage battery, heated 106
High-voltage battery, heavily dis-
charged 106
High-voltage system, automatic deactiva-
tion 65
High-voltage system, contact with water 65
High-voltage system, displays 120
Seite 276
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
276
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
High-voltage system, safety 65
High-voltage system, work 65
Hills 210
Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assis-
tant 165
Holder for beverages 200
HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote
Control 187
Homepage, see Internet 6
Hood 244
Horn 32
HUD Head-up Display 132
Hydroplaning 209
I
Ice warning, see External temperature
warning 125
Icy roads, see External temperature warn-
ing 125
Identification marks, tires 228
Identification number, see Vehicle identifi-
cation number 13
Illuminated ring, central instrument clus-
ter 131
Increasing the range 212
Indication of a flat tire 146, 150
Indicator and warning lights, see Check
Control 121
Indicator light, see Check Control 121
Individual air distribution 183
Individual settings, see Driver profiles 75
Inductive charging of a smartphone, see
Wireless charging tray 194
Inflation pressure, tires 227
Inflation pressure warning, tires 150
Information 6
Initialize, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 146
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 150
Input, iDrive 36
Instrument cluster 118
Instrument cluster, electronic displays 119
Instrument lighting 139
Integrated key 70
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi-
cle 60
Integrated Universal Remote Control 187
Intelligent emergency call 257
Intelligent Safety 152
Intended use 8
Intensity, AUTO program 183
Interior equipment 187
Interior lights 139
Interior lights during unlocking 67
Interior lights with the vehicle locked 68
Interior mirror 92
Interior mirror, automatic dimming fea-
ture 93
Interior mirror, compass 190
Interior mirror, manually dimmable 93
Interior motion sensor 80
Internet site 6
Interval display, service notifications 126
Interval mode 110, 114
In the vicinity of the center console 34
In the vicinity of the roofliner 35
In the vicinity of the steering wheel 32
IOM, see Integrated Owner's Manual in the
vehicle 60
J
Jacking points for the vehicle jack 240
Jam protection system, glass sunroof 84
Jam protection system, windows 81
Jump-starting 258
K
Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 72
Key, see Integrated key 70
Key, see Vehicle key 66
Knee airbag 142
L
Label on recommended tires 232
Label, runflat tires 233
Language, set on Control Display 48
Lashing eyes 202
LATCH child restraint fixing system 98
Seite 277
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
277
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Leather care 264
LED ring, central instrument cluster 131
LEDs, light-emitting diodes 251
Letters and numbers, entering 36
Level 1 charging 224
Level 1 charging cable 220
Level 2 charging cable 220
Light 135
Light-alloy wheels, care 264
Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 251
Lighter 192
Lighting 135
Light replacement 251
Light replacement, front 252
Light replacement, rear 252
Light replacement, side 253
Lights and bulbs 251
Light switch 135
List of all messages 50
Load 202
Loading 201
Loading position 203
Location, vehicle position 49
Locking, automatic 78
Locking, from inside 71
Locking, see Opening and Closing 66
Locking, settings 78
Longer idle phases 266
Long idle times, long-term vehicle stor-
age 266
Long-term vehicle storage 266
Low beams 135
Low beams, automatic, see High-beam As-
sistant 137
Lower back support, mechanical 86
Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage
rack 211
Lumbar support, mechanical 86
M
Maintenance 248
Maintenance requirements 248
Maintenance, service notifications 126
Maintenance system, MINI 248
Make-up mirror 192
Malfunction displays, see Check Con-
trol 121
Manual brake, see Parking brake 107
Manual control, air distribution 183
Manual control, air flow 183
Manual operation, PDC Park Distance Con-
trol 170
Manual operation, rearview camera 173
Manufacturer of the MINI 8
Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Nav-
igation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Matt paint, care 264
Maximum cooling 182
Maximum speed display, see Speed Limit
Info 127
Maximum speed, winter tires 233
Measuring units 49
Mechanical key 70
Media of the Owner's Manual 60
Medical kit 256
Menu in instrument cluster 128
Menus, Central Information Display
(CID) 40
Messages 50
Messages, see Check Control 121
Microfilter 184
MID - program, driving dynamics 164
MINI Connected, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
tion 6
MINI driving modes 164
MINI eDRIVE 0
MINI Electric Corona Spoke 2 Tone 231
MINI logo projection during unlocking 67
MINI maintenance system 248
MINIMALISM analyzer 216
MINIMALISM information 216
Minimum tread, tires 230
MINI Roadside Assistance 256
Mirrors 92
Mobile communication devices in the vehi-
cle 209
Mobile phone, connecting 52
Mobile phone, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment and Communica-
tion 6
Seite 278
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
278
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Mobile Service, see MINI Roadside Assis-
tance 256
Mobility System 234
Modifications, technical, see For Your Own
Safety 8
Moisture in headlight 252
Monitor, see Control Display 38
Mounting of child restraint systems 96
MP3 player, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 32
Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
N
Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints
front 89
Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints
rear 90
Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy rims 264
New wheels and tires 231
O
OBD Onboard Diagnosis 249
Obstacle marking, rearview camera 174
Odometer 124
Onboard Computer 129
Onboard Diagnosis OBD 249
Onboard literature, printed 60
Onboard vehicle tool kit 250
On-call service, see MINI Roadside Assis-
tance 256
Opening and Closing 66
Opening, from inside 71
Operating concept Central Information Dis-
play (CID) operating concept 36
Operating menus, Central Information Dis-
play (CID) 36
Operation via the Controller 40
Operation via touchscreen 41
Optional equipment 7
Owner's Manual, printed 60
P
Paint, car care 264
Panic alarm, see Panic mode 80
Panic mode 80
Panoramic glass sunroof 82
Parallel parking assistant 175
Park Distance Control PDC 169
Parked vehicle, condensation 210
Parked vehicle ventilation, see Stationary
climate control 184
Parking aid, see PDC 169
Parking assistant 175
Parking brake 107
Parking lights 135
Parts and accessories 8
Passenger's side exterior mirror, tilt down,
see Automatic Curb Monitor 93
Pathway lighting 136
Pathway lines, rearview camera 174
PDC Park Distance Control 169
Pedestrian Protection, acoustic 106
Performance Control 164
Performance display 120
Personal profile, see Driver profiles 75
Phone, connecting 52
Plastic, care 265
PostCrash - iBrake 160
Power failure 255
Power windows 81
Pressure, tires 227
Pressure warning, tires 150
Printed onboard literature 60
Profiles, see Driver profiles 75
Programmable memory buttons, Central In-
formation Display (CID) 42
Protective function, glass sunroof 84
Protective function, windows 81
Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 38
Seite 279
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
279
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Q
Quick charging cable, see Level 2 charging
cable 220
R
Racetrack operation 211
Radiator fluid 246
Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication 6
Rain sensor 110, 114
Range 125
Ratchet straps 202
Rear lights 252
Rear seat backrests, folding down 203
Rearview camera 172
Rear-view mirrors, exterior 92
Rear window defroster 184
Rear window wiper, operation 112, 115
Recirculated-air filter 184
Recirculated-air mode 183
Recommended tire brands 232
Recuperation, button 106
Remaining range 125
Remote control, universal 187
Remote services, app, see Owner's Hand-
book for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-
munication 6
Replacing parts 250
Replacing the battery, vehicle key 69
Replacing, wheels and tires 231
Reporting safety malfunctions 13
RES CNCL button, Cruise Control 167
Reserve warning, see Range 125
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 146
Retreaded tires 232
Roadside parking lights 136
Rolling code hand-held transmitter 188
Roofliner 35
Roof-mounted luggage rack 211
Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi-
cation 6
RSC Runflat System Component, see Runflat
tires 233
RTTI, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Rubber components, care 265
Runflat tires 233
S
Safe braking 209
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and
front passenger seat 89
Safety belt reminder for the rear seats 89
Safety belts 87
Safety belts, care 265
Safety of the high-voltage system 65
Safety systems, airbags 141
Screens, care 266
Screen, see Control Display 38
Screwdriver 250
Sealant, see Mobility System 234
Search for charging stations, see Owner's
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment,
Communication 6
Seat heating, front 87
Seating position for children 95
Seats and head restraints 85
Seats, front 85
Securing cargo 201
Selection list in instrument cluster 128
Sensors, care 266
Service and warranty 9
Service Center, see MINI Roadside Assis-
tance 256
Service notifications, display 126
Service requirements, Condition Based
Service CBS 248
Servotronic 165
SET button, Cruise Control 167
Settings, general 48
Settings, locking/unlocking 78
Settings, mirrors 92
Settings, seats and head restraints 85
Side airbag 141
Signaling, horn 32
Signals when unlocking 79
Seite 280
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
280
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Sitting safely 85
Sizes, see Dimensions 268
Slide/tilt glass roof 82
Smartphone, connecting 52
Smartphone, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment and Communica-
tion 6
Snow chains 238
Socket, OBD Onboard Diagnosis 249
Sockets, electrical devices 193
Software update 58
SOS button 257
Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
tion 6
Speed, average 129
Speed limit display, see Speed Limit
Info 127
Speed Limit Info 127
Speed warning 130
Split screen 37
SPORT program, driving dynamics 165
Stability control systems 162
Standard charging cable, see Level 1 charg-
ing cable 220
Standard charging, see Level 1 charg-
ing 224
Standard equipment 7
Standard view, Head-up Display 132
Standby state 100
Stars, MINIMALISM display 216
Start/Stop button 100
Stationary climate control 184
Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi-
cation 6
Status control display, tires 145
Status information, Central Information Dis-
play (CID) 37
Status of Owner's Manual 7
Status, vehicle 134
Steering assistance 165
Steering column adjustment 94
Steering wheel, adjusting 94
Stop function in stationary vehicle 108
Storage, charging cable 221
Storage compartments 198
Storage, tires 233
Storing the vehicle 266
Stowing and securing cargo 201
Suitable devices 53
Suitable mobile phones 53
Summer tires, tread 230
Sun visor 192
Supplementary Owner's Manuals 60
Supplementary text message 124
Switch for driving dynamics 164
Switching off, drive-ready state 104
Switching on, drive-ready state 101
Switch, see Cockpit 32
Symbols 6
T
Tailgate 74
Tailgate via vehicle key 68
Tail lights 252
Technical changes, see For Your Own
Safety 8
Technical data 268
Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
tion 6
Temperature, automatic climate con-
trol 181
Temperature display for external tempera-
ture 125
Text message, see Check Control mes-
sages 124
Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 79
Thigh support 86
Tilt alarm sensor 80
Tilt down, passenger's side exterior mirror,
see Automatic Curb Monitor 93
Time 48
Time of arrival 130
Tire damage 231
Tire identification marks 228
Tire inflation pressure 227
Seite 281
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
281
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
Tire inflation pressure monitoring, see
TPM 150
Tire pressure 227
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 145
Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 234
Tires 227
Tires, changing 231
Tire sealant, see Mobility System 234
Tires, runflat 233
Tire tread 230
Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication 6
Tools 250
Total vehicle weight 269
Touchscreen 41
Towing 259
TPM Flat Tire Monitor 150
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 145
Traction control 163
TRACTION, see Dynamic Traction Control,
DTC 163
Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
tion 6
Transmission lock, electronic unlock-
ing 104
Transporting children safely 95
Tread, tires 230
Trip computer 130
Triple turn signal activation 109
Trip odometer 124
Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 124
Trunk, see Cargo area 201
Turning radius lines, rearview camera 174
Turn signal, front 252
Turn signal, indicator light 123
Turn signal, side 253
Turn signals, operation 109
Turn signals, rear, bulb replacement 252
U
Unintentional alarm 80
Units, see Measuring units 49
Universal remote control 187
Unlocking, automatic 78
Unlocking, see Opening and Closing 66
Unlocking, settings 78
Updates made after the editorial deadline 7
Update, software 58
Updating software 58
Upholstery care 264
USB connection 55
USB port, position in vehicle 194
Used battery, disposing of 255
Use, intended 8
Using a smartphone via voice activation 46
V
Vanity mirror 192
Vehicle battery 254
Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assis-
tance 256
Vehicle, breaking in 208
Vehicle care 263
Vehicle care products 263
Vehicle features and options 7
Vehicle identification number 13
Vehicle jack 240
Vehicle key, additional 69
Vehicle key, loss 69
Vehicle key, malfunction 69
Vehicle key, opening/closing 66
Vehicle key, replacing the battery 69
Vehicle key, see Vehicle key 66
Vehicle paint, care 264
Vehicle position, vehicle location 49
Vehicle status 134
Vehicle wash 263
Vehicle wash, automatic 263
Vehicle, washing 262
Ventilation 184
Venting, see Stationary climate control 184
VIN, see Vehicle identification number 13
Voice activation 44
Voice command response 44
Voice recognition, see Active Voice Recog-
nition 44
Seite 282
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
282
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
W
Warning and indicator lights, see Check
Control 121
Warning displays, see Check Control 121
Warning messages, see Check Control 121
Warning triangle 256
Warranty 8
Washer fluid 117
Washer nozzles, windshield 112, 115
Washing the vehicle 262
Water, high-voltage system 65
Water on roads 209
Weights 269
Welcome lights 136
Welcome lights during unlocking 67
Wheel base, vehicle 268
Wheels 227
Wheels, changing 231
Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 145
Windows, powered 81
Windshield cleaning system 109, 113
Windshield washer fluid 117
Windshield washer nozzles 112, 115
Windshield wipers, fold-away posi-
tion 112, 116
Windshield wipers, see Wiper sys-
tem 109, 113
Winter storage, care 266
Winter tires, suitable tires 233
Winter tires, tread 230
Wiper blades, replacing 250
Wiper fluid 117
Wiper system 109, 113
Wireless charging of a smartphone, see
Wireless charging tray 194
Wireless charging tray for smart-
phones 194
Wood, care 265
Word match concept, navigation 36
Work, high-voltage system 65
Wrench 250
Seite 283
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
283
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
01405A02680 ue
*BL5A0268000Z*
California Proposition 65
Warning
For vehicles sold in California:
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
MINI MOTORER'S GUIDE APP.
Your customized information about the vehicle in an app.
Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.
01405A02680 ue
*BL5A0268000Z*
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A02680 - II/20
